JP7554228B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, there are known pachinko machines that perform a special game in which a lottery for a big win is held on the condition that a gaming ball enters a start winning hole, and a big winning hole is opened if the big win is won in the lottery, and a slot machine that performs a role lottery by inserting a gaming medal and operating a start switch, and can execute a bonus game if a bonus is won in the role lottery. In pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a winning hole such as the start winning hole or the big winning hole opened during a special game, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out corresponding to each winning hole (a predetermined amount of gaming value is given). In slot machines, when a small winning hole is won, a predetermined number of gaming medals are paid out corresponding to the type of small winning hole (a predetermined amount of gaming value is given).
In addition, in order to increase the interest of the player, these gaming machines generally have a specific presentation that suggests the results of the jackpot lottery or the winning combination lottery.
Furthermore, in recent years, in order to prevent a situation in which the game becomes too gambling-like as a result of winning a large number of game balls (game medals), a gaming machine like the one described above has been devised that stops the game when the difference between the number of game balls (game medals) paid out and the number of game balls (game medals) used in the game reaches a specific number (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-81211 A

In gaming machines such as those described above, the time that has elapsed from a predetermined point in time is measured, and processing is executed according to this elapsed time (for example, transitioning to a power-saving state in which power consumption is reduced according to the time that has elapsed from the start of a standby state in which the player is not playing).
Here, when the difference balls reach a specific number and the game stops, various irregular processes are executed, such as forcibly stopping the varying display of the special symbol that was being executed. However, if such irregular processes are executed frequently, the number of executing programs increases, which increases the load on hardware resources such as ROM, and increases the possibility of malfunctions occurring due to program defects, etc.

The present invention was made in light of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent, as much as possible, situations in which the load on hardware resources increases and malfunctions occur when processing to stop play based on the difference in balls is executed.

To achieve the above-mentioned objectives, the present invention is configured as follows.

(1) The present invention comprises a suggestion means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion, an operation means operable by a player, a game control means for controlling the progress of a game, an awarding means for awarding a predetermined amount of game value based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and a timing means for starting to measure an elapsed time based on the satisfaction of a predetermined start condition, wherein the game control means is capable of setting a game disabled state in which the progress of the game is disabled based on a differential amount, which is the difference between the amount of game value awarded by the awarding means from a predetermined calculation start point and the amount of game value used in the game, reaching a specific amount, and a setting value for the operation of the suggestion means can be set to one of a plurality of stages, and a predetermined indication is given based on the set setting value. The gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a suggestion, and to be able to set one of a plurality of setting values by performing a predetermined operation with the operating means, and to be able to execute a predetermined process when the elapsed time measured by the timing means reaches a predetermined time, and when measurement by the timing means is being performed, the measurement is continued even if the unplayable state is set, and when the unplayable state is set, the suggestion means is capable of executing a unplayable state suggestion that suggests that the unplayable state is being set, and even if the predetermined operation is performed while the unplayable state suggestion is being executed, the unplayable state suggestion is executed based on a predetermined specific setting value regardless of the predetermined operation .
Here, the gaming value includes physical gaming media such as gaming balls and gaming medals, as well as numerical data that has the same value as gaming media and stores a value corresponding to the number of gaming media. Also, granting gaming value includes actually paying out a corresponding amount of gaming media such as gaming balls and gaming medals (executing the payout of physical gaming media) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, as well as adding a corresponding amount to the above-mentioned numerical data based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
In view of the above, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes not only a gaming machine that imparts gaming value by actually paying out a corresponding amount of gaming media such as gaming balls or gaming medals (executing the payout of physical gaming media) based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, but also a gaming machine that has numerical data having the same value as gaming media and in which a value equivalent to the number of gaming media is stored, and instead of paying out gaming media based on the satisfaction of predetermined conditions, imparts gaming value by adding a corresponding amount to the above-mentioned numerical data based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions.
In addition, in the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko machine, the predetermined condition may include a ball entering a winning hole (start winning hole, big winning hole, etc.) provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, etc. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the predetermined condition may include a small winning combination being won by a winning combination lottery, and a symbol combination corresponding to the winning small winning combination being displayed on the pay line when all the rotating reels have stopped.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, even if a non-playable state in which game progress is disabled based on the difference ball is set, the measurement of the elapsed time that started based on the establishment of a predetermined start state continues. Therefore, there is no need to execute a process to stop the measurement of the elapsed time, and there is no need to provide a separate program or the like for executing a process to stop the measurement of the elapsed time when setting a non-playable state based on the difference ball, so it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the load on the hardware resources increases and malfunctions occur.
Furthermore, even if a game-unplayable state is set, a predetermined process can be executed when the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent as much as possible the situation in which the load on hardware resources increases and malfunctions occur when processing to stop a game based on the difference ball is executed.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front door open. 1 is a schematic front view of a gaming board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram of the back side of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an external oblique view of the main control board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table for determining a jackpot in a pachinko machine. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a winning symbol random number determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of a reach group determination random number judgment table for a pachinko machine. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a reach mode determination random number judgment table for a pachinko machine. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a reach mode determination random number judgment table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a variation pattern lottery table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a variable time determination table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a special electric device operating table of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a game status setting table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a winning determination random number judgment table for a pachinko machine. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram of the second start winning hole opening control table of a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram regarding the control state set when power is restored in a pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram regarding the control state set when power is restored in a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart outlining the power cut-off evacuation process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an outline of the main processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart outlining the processing performed when power is restored in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the difference ball control reset process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a sensor is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a gate is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when the first start winning port is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when the second start winning port is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a large prize opening is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when a general winning port is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing performed when an out is detected in the main control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of special chart-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special pattern variation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the jackpot lottery process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the variable presentation pattern determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special pattern variation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special game control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the special game ending processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a flowchart showing an outline of the general map-related control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal pattern variation start processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal symbol lottery process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal pattern variation stop processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the processing after a normal symbol stops in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the movable piece control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an outline of the solenoid control processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the difference ball related command set processing in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the difference ball determination control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a flowchart showing an outline of setting-related processing in a main control board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a diagram showing an example of various effects and various suggestions of a pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a variable effect determination table for a pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a volume setting image of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing an outline of the main processing in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in a sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the standby state start command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. A flowchart showing an outline of the start winning command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the rotation operation command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the variable command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the position correction process at the start of fluctuation in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the difference ball related command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the role control processing when the activation state is set in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the prize ball designation command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the error indication command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the error clear command receiving process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the operation control processing during standby state in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of a demo display control process in a sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the power saving state control process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the current speaker volume change process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the pre-warning volume adjustment process in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the volume adjustment process during activation warning/notice in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an outline of the volume adjustment process during activation in the sub-control board of a pachinko machine.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The gaming machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses gaming balls as a gaming medium. Although not shown in the figure, in an amusement parlor where the pachinko machines P are installed, a plurality of pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in an area where the gaming machines are installed, called an island, and a gaming ball lending device for lending the gaming balls is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding gaming ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R can accept the insertion of bills and a storage medium (card) that stores value information required for lending game balls. After inserting bills (or a card) into the game ball lending device R, a player can receive game balls from the game ball lending device R by performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment comprises a machine frame 1, which is a rectangular frame body fixed to an island and has a hollow portion (not shown), a main body frame 2, which is a rectangular frame body attached to the machine frame 1 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be freely opened and closed, and has a hollow portion (not shown), and a front door 3, which is attached to the main body frame 2 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be freely opened and closed, and has an opening (not shown) formed on the front.

2, a speaker serving as a sound output device 10 is provided at the lower left of the machine frame 1. A game board 11 for forming a game area 12 is housed in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. The front door 3 is provided with a transparent plate 4 covering the opening, an upper tray 6 and a receiving tray 7 located below the transparent plate 4 and capable of receiving game balls, an operating handle 5 attached to the right of the receiving tray 7 for operating to launch the game balls, and two speakers serving as sound output devices 10 attached to the upper left and right of the transparent plate 4, one each.
1, a front door performance lamp DL that produces effects by emitting light in various colors and light patterns is provided on the outer periphery of the front door 3, and a status notification lamp EL that emits light in various colors to notify various states that occur when predetermined conditions are met is provided on the upper left of the outer periphery of the front door 3. Both the front door performance lamp DL and the status notification lamp EL are composed of LEDs that can emit light in multiple colors.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main frame 2 is closed against the machine casing 1 and the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11 with a gap between them. This makes it possible to view the game board 11 located at the rear through the transparent plate 4.

In addition, the upper tray 6 is adapted to guide game balls dispensed by the game ball dispensing device R and prize balls dispensed from the pachinko machine P. The upper tray 6 is capable of receiving a predetermined amount of game balls, but when the upper tray 6 is filled with game balls, game balls that are subsequently dispensed or dispensed are guided to the receiving tray 7. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the bottom surface of the receiving tray 7 is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game balls and an opening/closing plate that can open and close the discharge hole. Normally, the discharge hole is closed by the opening/closing plate, but by moving the opening/closing lever 8 (see FIG. 1) attached integrally to the opening/closing plate in the horizontal direction, the opening/closing plate also moves in the same direction, opening the discharge hole. This allows the game balls to fall through the discharge hole and be discharged out of the receiving tray 7.

The operating handle 5 is also formed so that the player can rotate it in a predetermined direction. When the player rotates the operating handle 5, the game balls held in the upper tray 6 are sent to a launching device (not specifically shown), and the launching device launches the game balls toward the play area 12 with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the operating handle 5. The game balls launched in this manner are guided upward by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, and reach the play area 12.

Here, the game area 12 is a portion of the space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 when the main frame 2 and the front door 3 are closed to the machine frame 1, which is partitioned into an approximately circular shape by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, and is an area through which game balls can flow down.
As shown in Fig. 3, the game area 12 is composed of a first game area 12a, which is an area on the left side as seen by a player facing the pachinko machine P, and a second game area 12b, which is an area on the right side as seen by a player facing the pachinko machine P. These two game areas 12 have different possibilities for game balls to enter depending on the firing strength of the launching device. Specifically, when the firing strength of the launching device is less than a predetermined strength (a strength at which the game ball launched by the launching device does not reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball enters the first game area 12a. On the other hand, when the firing strength of the launching device is equal to or greater than a predetermined strength (a strength at which the game ball launched by the launching device can reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball enters the second game area 12b.

Also, within this game area 12, as shown in FIG. 3, there are provided a windmill and numerous nails for making the direction in which the game balls flow irregularly, a general winning hole 14 through which the game balls can enter, a first starting winning hole 15 and a second starting winning hole 16 as starting areas, a gate 20 through which the game balls can pass, an attacker device 17 that operates when a predetermined condition is met, an outlet 19 that guides the game balls out of the game area 12, a performance display device 21 that gives various performances and various suggestions (notifications) as the game progresses, a board performance lamp GL, a right hit notification lamp RL, and a role-playing device YS.

The general winning opening 14 is located at the lower left side of the game area 12, as shown in FIG. 3. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 14, a predetermined number of prize balls (five in this embodiment) are paid out. Note that the number and location of the general winning openings 14 are not particularly limited.

The first start winning opening 15 is located slightly below the center of the game area 12, as shown in FIG. 3. Game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning opening 15, but game balls flowing down the second game area 12b are almost unable to enter. In contrast, the second start winning opening 16 is located to the right of the center of the game area 12 (i.e., within the second game area 12b), as shown in FIG. 3. Game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second start winning opening 16, but game balls flowing down the first game area 12a are almost unable to enter.

3, the second start winning opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (normal electric device) that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second start winning opening 16 is in a closed state, and it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is opened, the second start winning opening 16 is in an open state, and the movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball toward the second start winning opening 16, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
Furthermore, the configuration of this movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and may be configured, for example, by a pair of blade members that rotate left and right around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 to open and close the second start winning opening 16, or a cover member that rotates back and forth around a horizontal axis to open and close the second start winning opening 16, or it may be configured by a shutter member that slides up and down to open and close the second start winning opening 16.
In addition, the installation locations of the first start winning port 15 and the second start winning port 16 are not particularly limited, and for example, the first start winning port 15 and the second start winning port 16 may be placed in a position where game balls flowing down either game area 12 (first game area 12a, second game area 12b) can easily enter the port.

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, a lottery is held for a big win, and one of a number of predetermined special symbols is determined. Each special symbol is associated with the possibility of executing a special game advantageous to the player, the game state to be set after the special game ends, and the like, and the player can receive game benefits such as the execution of a special game depending on the type of special symbol determined.
The number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 15 or the second start winning opening 16 is not particularly limited as long as it is one or more, and may be any number. Also, the number of prize balls may be the same or different between the start winning opening (second start winning opening 16) with the movable piece 16b and the start winning opening (first start winning opening 15) without the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 15 is three, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 16 is one.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gate 20 is provided above the second start winning opening 16. When a game ball passes through this gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol, which will be described later, is held. If the result of the lottery is a winning one, the movable piece 16b provided in the second start winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined time.

3, the attacker device 17 is provided below the second start winning opening 16. This attacker device 17 is equipped with a large winning opening 18 through which game balls can enter, and an opening/closing door 18b for opening and closing this large winning opening 18. This opening/closing door 18b is displaceable between an open position where the large winning opening 18 is opened, and a closed position where the large winning opening 18 is closed.
In the normal state, the opening and closing door 18b is in the closed position (i.e., the opening and closing door 18b is closed) and the large prize opening 18 is closed, so it is impossible for game balls to enter the large prize opening 18. However, when the above-mentioned special game is played, the opening and closing door 18b is in the open position (i.e., the opening and closing door 18b is open), so the large prize opening 18 is opened, and the opening and closing door 18b functions as a receiving tray member that guides game balls to the large prize opening 18, making it possible for game balls to enter the large prize opening 18.
When a game ball enters the big prize opening 18, a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in this embodiment) are paid out.

As shown in Figure 3, the outlet 19 is located at the bottom of the game area 12 and accepts game balls that do not enter any of the general winning opening 14, the first start winning opening 15, the second start winning opening 16, and the large winning opening 18.
Then, the game balls received at the outlet 19 and all of the above-mentioned winning ports (general winning port 14, first start winning port 15, second start winning port 16, and large winning port 18) are guided through an out passage (not specifically shown) to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

As shown in Fig. 3, the performance display device 21 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 12. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the performance display device 21. The performance display device 21 is provided with a display unit 21a for displaying images such as moving images and still images.
In the display unit 21a, a background image is displayed, and a variable performance is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols. In this variable performance, the performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the lottery for a jackpot is notified (suggested) to the player by the stop display mode of each performance symbol 50.
During special play, the display unit 21a performs an opening performance executed at the start of the special play, a round play performance executed during the round play described below, and an ending performance executed after all round plays have ended (at the end of the special play) (hereinafter, the opening performance, round play performance, and ending performance are collectively referred to as special play performance). An opening image is displayed in the opening performance, a round play image is displayed in the round play performance, and an ending image is displayed in the ending performance.
In addition, the performance display device 21 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be, for example, a drum-type display device that uses multiple drums with patterns on the outer circumference to display various types of information.

As shown in Fig. 2, the board performance lamp GL is provided at the top of the game area 12, and is a device that performs performances and gives suggestions by emitting light in various colors and light patterns. The board performance lamp GL is composed of an LED that can emit light in multiple colors. The installation position and the number of the board performance lamps GL are not particularly limited.
Although not specifically shown, the right-hit notification lamp RL is located on the right side of the performance display device 21 and is composed of an LED that can be turned on and off.

The role-playing device YS is a device that performs effects by operating in a predetermined manner.
The role production device YS of this embodiment is a disk-shaped structure as shown in Fig. 2, and can be displaced (moved) up and down within a range from an initial position corresponding to the upper center of the play area 12 to a movable position corresponding to approximately the center of the play area 12 by a drive motor M (not shown). In addition, the role production device YS can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise at the movable position by a rotation motor RM (not shown). The role production device YS normally stays at the initial position, and is displaced to the movable position at various times (for example, during the execution of a reach development performance described later), and at this movable position, a role rotation performance is performed in which the role rotation rotates clockwise or counterclockwise (operates in a predetermined manner).
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the initial position is above the top end of the performance display device 21, and the movable position is approximately the center of the performance display device 21. That is, the special feature performance device YS does not overlap with the performance display device 21 in the initial position where it stops in the normal state, but overlaps with the performance display device 21 at a predetermined gap in front of it in the movable position. This prevents the variable performance executed by the performance display device 21 from being obstructed by the special feature performance device YS in the normal state, and ensures the visibility of the variable performance. On the other hand, the special feature rotation performance is performed by displacing the special feature performance device YS to the movable position, so that the player can be drawn to the special feature rotation performance.
In addition, the performance performed by the accessory performance device YS is not limited to the accessory rotation performance. For example, the accessory performance device YS may be provided with a lamp such as an LED, and the lamp may be lit in a predetermined manner to perform a performance.

A performance operation device 9 is provided in front of the upper tray 6, which can be operated by the player to progress or switch the performance executed during play or standby. The performance operation device 9 is composed of an operation dial 9a that can be rotated and an operation button 9b that can be pressed. When a specific performance is being executed by the performance display device 21, rotating the operation dial 9a or pressing the operation button 9b causes various performances such as variable performances to progress or to switch to a different display.
In addition, the operation button 9b may be provided with a dedicated lamp (for example, an LED capable of emitting light in multiple colors) and may be lit in a predetermined manner at a predetermined timing to improve the presentation effect.

A cross key 25 that can be operated by the player is provided to the right of the performance operation device 9 on the upper tray 6 (see FIG. 1). This cross key 25 has an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, by pressing the up key or the down key on the cross key 25, the volume of the sound output device 10 (i.e., the volume of the sound or music output from the sound output device 10) can be changed within a range of multiple stages described later.
The volume of the sound output device 10 may be changed not by pressing the cross key 25 but by operating the performance operation device 9. A touch panel that can be operated by the player may be provided, and a button section for changing the volume of the sound output device 10 may be displayed on the touch panel, so that the volume of the sound output device 10 can be changed by touching the button section.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the lower right portion of the game board 11 and outside the game area 12, a first special symbol display device 30, a second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol reserved display device 38, a second special symbol reserved display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol reserved display device 33 are provided as devices for displaying various game statuses.

As described above, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is electrically connected to the game ball lending device R, and the pachinko machine P is configured to accept operations on the game ball lending device R, such as lending game balls and ejecting cards. For this reason, the pachinko machine P is provided with a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored in the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a card return button 37 that can be pressed, as shown in FIG. 1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, on the back side of the game board 11, a main control board 100 that stores the setting values and the control state of the pachinko machine P described below and controls the basic operation of the pachinko machine P is attached in a state stored in a transparent box-shaped main control board case 150, a launch and payout control board 200 that controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls is attached in a state stored in a transparent box-shaped launch and payout control board case 250, a sub-control board 300 that controls various effects is attached in a state stored in a transparent box-shaped sub-control board case 350, and a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R is attached in a state stored in a transparent box-shaped game ball lending control board case 450.

Further, on the rear side of the game board 11, a power supply board 600 for supplying power to each board is provided, and this power supply board 600 is provided with a power switch 650.
The power switch 650 can be switched on or off. When the power switch 650 is turned on, power is supplied from the power supply board 600 to each board, and when the power switch 650 is turned off, the supply of power from the power supply board 600 to each board is stopped.
In this specification, when the power switch 650 is turned on and power is supplied, this is also referred to as "power on," and when the power switch 650 is turned off and the supply of power is stopped, this is also referred to as "power off."

(Configuration of the control means of the pachinko machine P)
Next, the control means for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine P will be described.
The above-mentioned control means is composed of a main control board 100, a launch and payout control board 200, a sub-control board 300, a game ball lending control board 400 and a power supply board 600, as shown in FIG.
6, the main control board 100 is connected to a launching/payout control board 200 and a sub-control board 300, and the launching/payout control board 200 is connected to a game ball lending control board 400. The main control board 100 and the launching/payout control board 200 are connected to an external information terminal board 500 for transmitting various signals (information) relating to the progress of the game to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a hall computer in an amusement facility). A power supply board 600 is also connected to each board.

(Outline of main control board 100)
As described above, the main control board 100 stores the setting values and the control state of the pachinko machine P, and controls the games played on the pachinko machine P. Specifically, it controls the special game that is started when the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, the normal game that is started when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and the special games described above.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple stages from setting value 1 to setting value 6 are set as the setting for the ball output, and the probability of winning a jackpot, which will be described later, differs depending on the setting value. For example, setting value 6 is set to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than setting value 1, and if the probability of winning a jackpot is high, the possibility of winning prize balls also increases, so by changing the setting value, the amount of prize balls expected to be paid out in the pachinko machine P changes. In addition, a jackpot determination random number judgment table 110 that determines the probability of winning a jackpot, which will be described later, is provided for each of the setting values 1 to 6, and when the setting value is changed, the jackpot determination random number judgment table 110 provided for each setting value is changed in its entirety.
The set value may be set to two to five levels instead of six levels, or only one set value may be provided.

In addition, when the power is on, the pachinko machine P in this embodiment remains in one of four control states: a playable state in which game can be played, a setting confirmation state in which the set setting values can be confirmed, a setting change state in which the set setting values can be changed, and a game stopped state in which game play cannot be played, and the setting values cannot be confirmed or changed.
When the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a setting change state, the set setting value can be changed (switched) by performing a specified operation.
The storage and modification of set values, the control states that are set when the power is turned on, etc. will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 in this embodiment is a rectangular plate-shaped board, and is a single-sided board (single-layer board) with a wiring pattern provided on only one side. Note that the main control board 100 may also be a double-sided board (two-layer board) with a wiring pattern provided on both sides.

As shown in FIG. 5, the surface of the main control board 100 is provided with a one-chip main IC 104 that integrates the main CPU 101, main ROM 102, and main RAM 103, as well as multiple other ICs, a main information display device 105, a connector 106, a setting switch 108, a RAM clear switch 109, etc.

The main CPU 101 is a device that performs various calculation processes. The main ROM 102 is a device (Read Only Memory) that has a memory area that stores a spec code that indicates the specifications of the pachinko machine P (such as the high and low probability of winning a jackpot, and the method of determining the game state after the special game ends), a control program required for the game, and tables (such as a jackpot determination random number determination table 110 and a winning symbol random number determination table 111, which will be described later). The main RAM 103 is a device (Read Write Memory) that can store the above-mentioned setting values, the control state of the pachinko machine P, and various data related to the progress of the game, and also has a readable and writable memory area that is used for storing temporary data during calculation processes by the main CPU 101.
The main CPU 101 reads out control programs and tables stored in the main ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on signals from various sensors and timers described below, and also performs processing such as controlling various devices connected to the main CPU 101 and sending commands to other boards (such as the sub-control board 300) based on the results of the arithmetic processing.

Although not specifically shown, the memory area of the main RAM 103 in this embodiment is broadly divided into a used area, which is the area between a predetermined start address (for example, F00H (alphanumeric characters with an "H" at the end are written in hexadecimal; the same applies below)) and a predetermined final address (for example, F200H), and an unused area, which is the area between a specific start address (for example, F300H) that is a specific distance (for example, 16 bytes) or more away from the final address of the used area and a specific final address (for example, F400H).

Also, although not specifically shown, the used area includes four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, arranged in that order from a specified start address to a specified end address.
The first area stores the setting value and a gaming machine state flag indicating the control state during the stay (playable state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, game stopped state). The second area stores the checksum of the main RAM 103 calculated when the power is turned off, and a backup flag for determining whether there is an abnormality in the backup process of the main RAM 103 performed when the power is turned off. The third area stores information on errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine P, etc.
In addition, the fourth area stores various data related to the progress of the game (information on the special symbols during the change, the launch position of the game ball (the game area 12 from which the game ball is shot), the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, the number of times of special bonus, the number of times of time reduction, execution phase data showing the progress of the special symbol game, the number of reserved normal symbols, normal symbol execution phase data showing the progress of the normal symbol game, information that the special symbol is not changing, etc.). Note that the data stored in the fourth area is not limited to these, and for example, in a pachinko machine P set so that a special change pattern is determined when the number of changes after the special game ends reaches a specific number, the information on the specific number of times described above may be stored.

In addition, the unused area stores data such as the number of balls shot and the number of prize balls paid out since the game started in the initial state after shipping from the factory, etc. Specifically, the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning hole 14, the first start winning hole 15, the second start winning hole 16, and the large winning hole 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of prize balls), the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the large winning hole 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of special electric role prize balls), the total number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the first start winning hole 15, the second start winning hole 16, and the large winning hole 18 (hereinafter referred to as the total number of role prize balls), etc. are stored.
In this unused area, information relating to the game, such as the payout rate, special electric device ratio, device ratio, etc., is calculated based on data such as the number of balls fired and the number of winning balls mentioned above.
Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, and is a value calculated by total number of winning balls/number of shot balls. The special electric device ratio is the ratio of the total number of winning balls of special electric devices to the total number of winning balls, and is a value calculated by total number of winning balls of special electric devices/total number of winning balls. The device ratio is the ratio of the total number of winning balls of devices to the total number of winning balls, and is a value calculated by total number of winning balls of devices/total number of winning balls.

It should be noted that the data stored in the unused area is not limited to these, and for example, the total number of winning balls based on the entry of game balls into the general winning port 14 may be stored.
In addition, in this specification, data such as the number of balls fired and the number of winning balls paid out stored in the above-mentioned unused area are also referred to as "game performance data," and information related to the game, such as the above-mentioned ball payout rate, is also referred to as "game performance display information."

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a difference ball count value used for the operation stop control based on the difference ball count (hereinafter also referred to as the difference ball operation stop control) described later, and difference ball operation stop control phase data for setting various states related to the difference ball operation stop control (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, activation state described later) are stored in a specific area in the unused area. Note that the difference ball count value and the difference ball operation stop control phase data may be stored in any of the above-mentioned first to fourth areas instead of being stored in the unused area.
The difference ball operation stop control will be described in detail later.

The main information display device 105 is a device that displays various information, and is composed of four 7-segment displays with decimal points arranged side by side. The main information display device 105 in this embodiment does not have a built-in processor such as a CPU that performs its own calculation processing on the data it receives, and only displays information based on the data it receives from the main IC 104.
Specifically, during a setting confirmation state or during a setting change state, the setting values stored in the use area (first area) of the main RAM 103 are displayed. During a playable state, game performance display information stored in a non-use area of the main RAM 103 is displayed. During a game stop state or if an error occurs in the pachinko machine P, a code indicating that fact is displayed.
Note that the main information display device 105 may be configured with a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, etc., instead of a seven-segment display. Also, the main information display device 105 may have other devices built in as long as it does not have a device for independently processing data received from the main IC 104, and may have a driver circuit or the like built in for controlling the operation of the main information display device 105.

The connectors 106 are for connecting various harnesses, cables, etc., and are provided in plurality on the surface of the main control board 100 .
The setting switch 108 is referenced to set the control state (playable state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, game stopped state) when the power is turned on. The setting switch 108 is provided with an operating section (not shown) with a keyhole, and is formed so that it can be rotated when a specified key is inserted into the keyhole. Normally, the setting switch 108 is off, but when it is rotated, the setting switch 108 is turned on.
The RAM clear switch 109 is used to clear various data stored in the main RAM 103 and to change settings. This RAM clear switch 109 is provided with a push button 109a (see FIG. 5) that can be pressed, and when this push button 109a is not pressed, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, but when the push button 109a is pressed, the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on.

In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the power goes from off to on (recovery from a power outage), one of the control states is set depending on the control state that was in place before the power was turned off (just before the power outage occurred), whether the setting switch 108 is on or off at the time the power is turned on (when the power outage is restored), whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on or off, whether the main body frame open detection sensor 2a described later is on or off (i.e., whether the main body frame 2 is open or closed), whether an abnormality has occurred in the backup process of the main RAM 103 performed at the time the power is turned off, and whether an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.
Then, by operating the push button 109a (the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on) during the setting change state, the setting value can be changed (switched). As described above, the setting value is stored in the usage area of the main RAM 103, and when the setting value is changed, the setting value stored in the usage area of the main RAM 103 is changed.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 stores not only the game performance data and setting values described above, but also various data related to the progress of the game (the number of first special charts reserved, the number of second special charts reserved, execution phase data indicating the progress of the special chart game, the number of regular charts reserved, regular chart execution phase data indicating the progress of the regular chart game, etc.).
In addition, the devices and electronic components provided on the surface of the main control board 100 are not limited to those described above, and for example, switches for displaying various information on the main information display device 105 or switching the display content may be provided.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, both clearing of data stored in the main RAM 103 and changing of set values are performed by operating the RAM clear switch 109, but this is not limited to this. For example, a setting change switch separate and independent from the RAM clear switch 109 may be provided, and the RAM clear switch 109 may be set to be used for clearing data stored in the main RAM 103, and the setting change switch may be set to be used for changing set values.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 includes a general winning opening detection sensor 14a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 14, a first start winning opening detection sensor 15a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 15, a second start winning opening detection sensor 16a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 16, a special winning opening detection sensor 18a for detecting the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening 18, and a gate 20 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening 20. Connected to the gate detection sensor 20a are a gate detection sensor 20a which detects when the gate has passed, a setting switch 108, a RAM clear switch 109, a magnetic detection sensor 70a which detects magnetism directed toward the game board 11, a radio wave detection sensor 71a which detects radio waves irradiated to specific locations on the game board 11 (the first start winning hole 15, the second start winning hole 16, the large winning hole 18, etc.), and a vibration detection sensor 72 which detects vibrations caused by fraudulent activities such as shaking the pachinko machine P.
The detection signals output from each of these detection sensors and signals indicating the on/off state of each switch are input to a main control board 100.

When the magnetic detection sensor 70a detects magnetism, it turns on and outputs a magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100, and the magnetic detection signal is output continuously while the magnetic field is being detected. When the magnetic detection sensor 70a no longer detects magnetism, it turns off and stops outputting the magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100. When the magnetic detection signal is input from the magnetic detection sensor 70a, the main control board 100 determines that a main control magnetic error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the radio wave detection sensor 71a detects radio waves, it turns on and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100, and while radio waves are being detected, the radio wave detection signal is output continuously. When the radio wave detection sensor 71a no longer detects radio waves, it turns off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100. Furthermore, when the radio wave detection signal is input from the radio wave detection sensor 71a, the main control board 100 determines that a main control radio wave error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the vibration detection sensor 72 detects that the pachinko machine P is vibrating, it turns on and outputs a vibration detection signal to the main control board 100, and while vibration is being detected, the vibration detection signal is output continuously. When the vibration detection sensor 72 no longer detects vibration of the pachinko machine P, it turns off and stops outputting the vibration detection signal to the main control board 100. Furthermore, when a vibration detection signal is input from the vibration detection sensor 72, the main control board 100 determines that a main control vibration error has occurred.

The special prize opening detection sensor 18a is provided midway along the path from the special prize opening 18 to the special prize opening discharge port. In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the special prize opening 18 until the game ball is detected by the special prize opening detection sensor 18a is approximately 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected to the following devices to be controlled: a start winning port solenoid 16c which drives the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 to open and close, a large winning port solenoid 18c which drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning port 18 to open and close, a first special pattern display device 30, a second special pattern display device 31, a normal pattern display device 32, a first special pattern reserve display device 38, a second special pattern reserve display device 39, a normal pattern reserve display device 33, and a main information display device 105.
The main control board 100 drives each solenoid to control the opening and closing of the second start winning opening 16 and the large winning opening 18, and also controls the display of each display device.

(Overview of the firing and dispensing control board 200)
The launch and payout control board 200 mainly controls the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports and game balls loaned out based on specific operations by the player, as well as the launch of game balls.
As shown in Figure 6, the launch payout control board 200 is equipped with a payout CPU 201, a payout ROM 202 and a payout RAM 203, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally.

As shown in FIG. 6, the launch/dispatch control board 200 is connected to devices for controlling the launch of game balls, including a touch sensor 5a that detects when the player touches the operating handle 5, an operating volume 5b that detects the operating angle (rotation angle) of the operating handle 5, a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of game balls, a ball feed solenoid 60 that sends the game balls held in the upper tray 6 to a launch device (not shown), a launch motor 61 that launches the game balls, and a launched ball detection sensor 64 that detects when the game balls are launched by the launch motor 61. Control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, the operating volume 5b, and the launch stop switch 5c are input to the launch/dispatch control board 200.

When the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a playable state and the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control described later is in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notice state, if the player touches the operation handle 5 to perform a rotation operation, a control signal (hereinafter also referred to as a rotation operation signal) from the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b is input to the launching and dispensing control board 200, and the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launching motor 61 are energized to perform control to launch the game balls. Then, when the player releases contact with the operation handle 5 or stops rotating the operation handle 5, the input of the rotation operation signal to the launching and dispensing control board 200 stops, and the control to launch the game balls also stops.
In addition, even if a rotation operation signal is input to the launch/payout control board 200, when a control signal from the launch stop switch 5c (hereinafter also referred to as the launch stop control signal) is input to the launch/payout control board 200, control is performed to stop the flow of electricity to the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 and stop the launch of the game ball.
Furthermore, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a play-stop state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a playable state and the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control is in an activated state, even if a rotation operation signal is input to the launch/payout control board 200, the ball feed solenoid 60 and the launch motor 61 are not energized, and no control is performed to launch the game balls.
In addition, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a game stop state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a playable state, regardless of the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control (i.e., regardless of whether the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control is a pre-activation warning state, an activation warning state, an activation notice state, or an activation state), the launch payout control board 200 transmits a handle operation command to the main control board 100 when a rotation operation signal is input, and stops transmitting the handle operation command to the main control board 100 when the input of the rotation operation signal stops. In other words, while the rotation signal is being input (while the player is touching the operating handle 5 to perform a rotation operation), the handle operation command is continuously transmitted to the main control board 100.

6, a payout motor 62 that pays out game balls stored in a game ball storage section (not shown) and a payout counting switch 63 that detects and counts the paid-out game balls are connected to the launch payout control board 200. Although not shown, the payout counting switch 63 has a built-in payout radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves irradiated to the switch.
When the launch payout control board 200 receives the prize ball designation command transmitted from the main control board 100, the launch payout control board 200 controls the payout motor 62 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on the prize ball designation command. At this time, the number of paid-out game balls is counted by the payout count switch 63, making it possible to determine whether the predetermined number of game balls have been paid out.

In addition, the launch payout control board 200 in this embodiment transmits a payout prize ball signal based on the fact that the payout motor 62 has actually paid out the game balls (the game balls have been counted by the payout count switch 63) to the external information terminal board 500 as a signal related to the payout of the game balls (prize balls). As a result, the above signal is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P (such as an external information display device or hall computer that displays information such as the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots) via the external information terminal board 500, and the number of game balls actually paid out can be grasped by a device external to the pachinko machine P.
In addition, the signal related to the payout of the game balls (prize balls) is not limited to the payout prize ball signal. For example, instead of a signal based on the actual payout of the game balls, a received prize ball signal based on the reception of a prize ball designation command from the main control board 100 may be transmitted to the external information terminal board 500. This may allow an external device of the pachinko machine P to know the number of game balls to be paid out based on the received prize ball designation command.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the launch and payout control board 200 is connected to a main frame open detection sensor 2a that detects the open state of the main frame 2, a front door open detection sensor 3a that detects the open state of the front door 3, a tray full detection sensor 7a that detects the full state of the tray 7, an out sensor 19a that detects game balls that are received into the out port 19 or that enter each winning port and are guided to the back side of the game board 11 through the out passage, and an out port radio wave detection sensor 71b that detects radio waves irradiated to the out port 19.

The main body frame open detection sensor 2a turns on when it detects that the main body frame 2 is open, and outputs a main body frame open detection signal to the launch/dispense control board 200. The main body frame open detection signal is output continuously while the main body frame 2 is open. Then, when the main body frame open detection signal is input, the launch/dispense control board 200 transmits a main body frame open command to the main control board 100.
In response to this, the main body frame open detection sensor 2a turns off when it no longer detects that the main body frame 2 is open, and stops outputting the main body frame open detection signal. When the input of the main body frame open detection signal stops, the launch and payout control board 200 determines that the main body frame 2 is closed, and stops sending the main body frame open command to the main control board 100.

The front door open detection sensor 3a turns on when it detects that the front door 3 is open, and outputs a door open detection signal to the shooting/dispensing control board 200. The door open detection signal is output continuously while the front door 3 is open. Then, when the door open detection signal is input, the shooting/dispensing control board 200 transmits a door open command to the main control board 100.
In response to this, the front door open detection sensor 3a turns off when it no longer detects that the front door 3 is open, and stops outputting the door open detection signal. When the input of the door open detection signal stops, the shot/dispense control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed, and stops sending the door open command to the main control board 100.

The tray full detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position of the tray 7. When the tray 7 is filled with a predetermined amount of game balls to be paid out as prize balls, the stored game balls reach the above-mentioned predetermined position.
The tray full detection sensor 7a is turned on when it detects that the game balls have reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and outputs a tray detection signal to the launch/payout control board 200. While the stored game balls are at the above-mentioned predetermined position, the tray detection signal is continuously output. Then, when the tray detection signal is input, the launch/payout control board 200 transmits a tray full command to the main control board 100.
In response to this, when the tray full detection sensor 7a no longer detects that the gaming ball has reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, it turns off and stops outputting the tray detection signal to the launch/payout control board 200. Then, when the input of the tray detection signal stops, the launch/payout control board 200 determines that the tray 7 full state has been released, and stops sending the tray full command to the main control board 100.

The out sensor 19a is provided in the out passage. The out sensor 19a turns on each time it detects a game ball that is received in the out port 19 or enters each winning port and passes through the out passage, and outputs an out signal to the launch payout control board 200. The launch payout control board 200 then transmits an out command to the main control board 100 each time an out signal is input.

The outlet radio wave detection sensor 71 b is provided at a predetermined position around the outlet 19 .
In addition, the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b turns on when it detects radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the release/dispense control board 200, and while it is detecting radio waves, the radio wave detection signal is output continuously. In contrast, when the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b no longer detects radio waves, it turns off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the release/dispense control board 200.

As described above, the dispensing radio wave detection sensor is built into the dispensing counting switch 63.
In addition, the dispensing radio wave detection sensor turns on when it detects radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the dispensing control board 200. While it is detecting radio waves, the radio wave detection signal is continuously output. In contrast, when the dispensing radio wave detection sensor no longer detects radio waves, it turns off and stops outputting the radio wave detection signal to the dispensing control board 200.

As described above, the launching and dispensing control board 200 is connected to a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R. As shown in Fig. 6, the launching and dispensing control board 200 is connected to a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a that detects the pressing operation of the ball lending button 36, and a card return switch 37a that detects the pressing operation of the card return button 37 via the game ball lending control board 400.
In addition, these devices may be connected directly to the launching and dispensing control board 200 rather than being connected to the launching and dispensing control board 200 via the game ball lending control board 400.

When a card storing value information for lending game balls (i.e., a card with a balance) is inserted into the game ball lending device R and recognized, a value information signal indicating the value information is transmitted from the game ball lending device R to the value information display device 35 via the launch/payout control board 200 and the game ball lending control board 400. As a result, the value information display device 35 displays value information corresponding to the received value information signal.

In addition, when a card storing value information for lending game balls is inserted into the game ball lending device R and the ball lending button 36 is pressed while it is recognized, a detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is transmitted to the game ball lending device R via the game ball lending control board 400 and the launching and dispensing control board 200.
Upon receiving the above-mentioned detection signal, the game ball lending device R performs a process of subtracting predetermined value information from the stored value information, and sends a loan ball payout command to the launching and payout control board 200 to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to the subtracted value information (for example, 125 balls) as loan balls, and also sends a subtraction command corresponding to the subtracted value information to the value information display device 35 via the launching and payout control board 200 and the game ball lending control board 400.
Then, when a ball dispense command is received, the ball dispense control board 200 performs control to dispense a number of game balls (for example, 125 balls) corresponding to the subtracted value information. Also, when a subtraction command is received, the value information display device 35 updates and displays the value information after the subtraction.

When the card return button 37 is pressed, a detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the launch/payout control board 200, which then transmits a return request signal to the game ball lending device R, requesting the return of the card. When the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, it controls the game ball lending device R to eject the card.

In addition, the game ball lending device R may also control the card to be ejected when a card that does not store value information for lending game balls (i.e., a card with no balance) is inserted into the game ball lending device R, or when the ball lending button 36 is pressed to subtract a certain amount of value information, resulting in all of the value information stored in the card being lost (i.e., when the card has no balance).

As described above, the launch payout control board 200 controls both the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the various winning ports (general winning port 14, first start winning port 15, second start winning port 16, and large winning port 18), and the payout of game balls (loan balls) that are lent based on the player's operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, errors related to the equipment connected to the launch and payout control board 200 (hereinafter also referred to as payout-related errors) may occur, such as a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, a payout motor error, and a door open error.
The launching payout control board 200 is configured to determine (detect) the occurrence of payout-related errors, such as a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, and a payout motor error, based on the operating status of the above-mentioned switch connected to the launching payout control board 200, and the various signals output to the launching payout control board 200 from the above-mentioned sensors connected to the launching payout control board 200.
In this specification, determining that an error has occurred does not only mean specifically determining that an error has occurred based on the operation status of the switch and detection by various sensors (for example, the dispensing radio wave detection sensor, the main frame opening detection sensor 2a, etc.), but also means that the operation status of the switch and detection by various sensors have been detected.

A ball out error is an error that occurs when there are no game balls stored in the game ball storage section. The launch/payout control board 200 determines that a ball out error has occurred when the payout motor 62 is operating to pay out game balls, but the payout counting switch 63 does not count the game balls for a specified period of time. When a ball out error occurs, a ball out error command indicating this is sent from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to grasp the occurrence of the ball out error.

A full tank error is an error that occurs when the tray 7 is full. When the tray detection signal is input, the launch/dispense control board 200 determines that a full tank error has occurred. When a full tank error occurs, a full tank error command indicating this is sent from the launch/dispense control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to recognize the occurrence of a full tank error.

A payout counting switch error is an error that occurs when the payout counting switch 63 does not operate due to a broken harness, etc. The launch payout control board 200 determines that a payout counting switch error has occurred when it is unable to confirm the operation of the payout counting switch 63. When a payout counting switch error occurs, a payout counting switch error command indicating this is sent from the launch payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to grasp the occurrence of a payout counting switch error.

A ball jam error is an error that occurs when an operational abnormality occurs in the payout motor 62. The launch/payout control board 200 determines that a ball jam error has occurred when the payout motor 62 receives an activation signal but does not operate. When a ball jam error occurs, a ball jam error command indicating this is sent from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to grasp the occurrence of a ball jam error.

An excess prize ball error is an error that occurs when game balls are dispensed despite no prize ball designation command having been received, or when more game balls are dispensed than the number of game balls that were scheduled to be dispensed based on the received prize ball designation command. The launch payout control board 200 determines that an excess prize ball error has occurred when the number of game balls dispensed despite not being scheduled reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). When an excess prize ball error occurs, an excess prize ball error command indicating this is sent from the launch payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to grasp the occurrence of the excess prize ball error.

A dispensing radio wave error is an error that occurs when irradiation of radio waves is detected. When a radio wave detection signal is input from the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b or the dispensing radio wave detection sensor, the release/dispensing control board 200 determines that a dispensing radio wave error has occurred. When a dispensing radio wave error occurs, a dispensing radio wave error command indicating this is sent from the release/dispensing control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to grasp the occurrence of a dispensing radio wave error.

A payout motor error is an error that occurs when the payout motor 62 does not operate due to a broken harness, etc. The launch/payout control board 200 determines that a payout motor error has occurred when it is unable to confirm that the payout motor 62 is operating. When a payout motor error occurs, a payout motor error command indicating this is sent from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, allowing the main control board 100 to grasp the occurrence of a payout motor error.

Furthermore, among the dispensing-related errors, a door open error is an error that occurs when the main frame 2 or the front door 3 is open.
As described above, the main frame opening detection sensor 2a, which detects the opening of the main frame 2, and the front door opening detection sensor 3a, which detects the opening of the front door 3, are both connected to the launching and dispensing control board 200, but the determination of the occurrence of a door opening error is made by the main control board 100, not the launching and dispensing control board 200.
Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives at least one of a main frame open command transmitted from the launching/dispensing control board 200 when a main frame open detection signal is input to the launching/dispensing control board 200, or a front door open command transmitted from the launching/dispensing control board 200 when a front door open detection signal is input to the launching/dispensing control board 200, the main control board 100 determines that a door open error has occurred.
When it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the main control board 100 transmits a payout stop command for stopping control of the payout operation of the game balls to the launch payout control board 200. As a result, while the door opening error is occurring, the launch payout control board 200 performs control to stop the payout operation of the game balls.

Note that among the dispensing-related errors, the occurrence of which is determined by the main control board 100 is not limited to door open errors, and the occurrence of other errors may also be determined by the main control board 100.

In addition, the main control board 100 is also configured to determine the occurrence of errors related to the devices connected to the main control board 100 (such as the above-mentioned main control radio wave error, main control magnetic error, main control vibration error, abnormal winning errors that occur when an excessive number of game balls enter the first start winning port 15, the second start winning port 16, or the large winning port 18, and illegal winning errors that occur when a game ball enters the large winning port 18 other than when a special game is being played, hereinafter referred to as main control related errors).
When the main control board 100 detects the occurrence of a dispensing-related error other than a door-opening error, or when it is determined that a door-opening error or a main control-related error has occurred, the main CPU 101 transmits an error indication command indicating the error that has occurred to the sub-control board 300. This allows the sub-control board 300 to also detect the occurrence of various errors, and the error that has occurred is indicated by displaying an error indication image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the performance display device 21, lighting up various lamps (board performance lamp GL, front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) in a manner corresponding to the error that has occurred, and outputting an error indication sound corresponding to the error that has occurred from the sound output device 10.
Furthermore, when the cause of the error disappears and the error that occurred is resolved, the main control board 100 grasps or judges that the error that occurred has been resolved by, for example, no longer receiving commands used to judge the error. Then, when the main CPU 101 grasps that the error that occurred has been resolved or judges that the error that occurred has been resolved, it transmits an error resolution command indicating that the error has been resolved to the sub-control board 300. This allows the sub-control board 300 to grasp that the error that occurred has been resolved and to end the suggestion of the error that occurred.

(Outline of the sub-control board 300)
The sub-control board 300 controls the presentation that is executed during play, standby, etc.
As shown in Figure 6, this sub-control board 300 is equipped with a sub-CPU 301 which performs various types of calculation processing, a sub-ROM 302 which stores control programs for executing performances, data and tables necessary for executing performances, etc., and a sub-RAM 303 which is used as a temporary storage area during calculation processing, and is connected so as to enable one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.

In addition, based on commands transmitted from the main control board 100 and signals from a timer, the sub-CPU 301 reads out control programs stored in the sub-ROM 302 and performs calculations, and transmits commands for executing performances to an image control board (not shown) for controlling image display, an audio control board (not shown) for controlling audio output, an illumination control board (not shown) for controlling the lighting of various lamps, and an operation control board (not shown) for controlling the displacement of the prop performance device YS and the prop rotation performance.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, the audio control board and the illumination control board are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide a single board (audio and illumination control board) that combines the functions of these boards, and to use this board to control both the audio output and the lighting.

The sub-control board 300 is also connected to the performance display device 21 via an image control board, and to the audio output device 10 and the cross key detection sensor 25a that detects the pressing operation of the cross key 25 via an audio control board. The sub-control board 300 is also connected to various lamps (front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, board performance lamp GL, right hit notification lamp RL), a rotation operation detection sensor 9c that detects the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, and a pressing operation detection sensor 9d that detects the pressing operation of the operation button 9b via an illumination control board. The sub-control board 300 is also connected to the drive motor M and the rotation motor RM via an operation control board.

The image control board is equipped with an image CPU, image ROM, image RAM, etc., although not specifically shown. The image ROM of this image control board stores image data such as the designs and backgrounds to be displayed on the performance display device 21. Then, based on commands sent from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls the image display by the performance display device 21 by storing image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

Although not specifically shown, the audio control board is equipped with a sound CPU (sound chip) that executes various processes related to audio output, a sound ROM that stores sound data such as audio and background music (hereinafter also referred to as audio, etc.) output from the audio output device 10, a decoder that performs decoding of the sound data, a sound RAM used as a temporary storage area when executing various processes related to audio output, and a sound timer counter that measures the time when executing various processes related to audio output.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the voice control board receives a command (such as a command related to the execution of various effects and various suggestions) from the sub-control board 300, the decoder reads out sound data corresponding to the received command from the sound ROM and decodes it. This decoder has a predetermined number of channels (40 in this embodiment) for outputting sounds, etc., and is capable of independently outputting a predetermined number of types of sounds, etc. at the same time. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a channel used for outputting the sounds, etc. is previously associated with each type of sound, etc., output in various effects and various suggestions. As a result, the sounds, etc. are output by the previously associated channel. Then, the sound data decoded in each channel of the decoder is converted into analog data, and based on this analog data, a predetermined sound, etc. is output from the sound output device 10 via the output interface.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the channel used to output the sound is pre-assigned to each type of sound output in various effects and various suggestions. This prevents a situation where one sound is not output while another is being output, since each sound is output using a separate channel even when multiple types of sounds are output simultaneously at a given time, and ensures the simultaneous output of multiple types of sounds.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described later, the volume of the sound output device 10 (hereinafter also referred to as the speaker volume) can be set, and the volume at which sounds, etc. are output can be adjusted for each channel. As a result, sounds, etc. associated with each channel are output by the speaker volume adjusted for each channel.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, one of a plurality of channel adjustment values, "0", "1", and "2", can be set for each channel. When the channel adjustment value is "2", sounds and the like are output at the currently set speaker volume (hereinafter also referred to as the current speaker volume). When the channel adjustment value is "1", sounds and the like are output at a volume 75% lower than the current speaker volume (25% of the current speaker volume). When the channel adjustment value is "0", sounds and the like are output at a volume 100% lower than the current speaker volume (0% of the current speaker volume).
That is, when the channel adjustment value is "1" for a specific channel, the sound etc. associated with that channel is output at a lower volume than when the channel adjustment value is "2," making it more difficult to hear the sound etc. compared to when the channel adjustment value is "2." Also, when the channel adjustment value is "0" for a specific channel, the sound etc. associated with that channel is output silently, so although the sound etc. is being output, it is not possible to hear the sound etc.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when power is restored from a power outage, the initial channel adjustment value for each channel is set to "2." The data of the currently set channel adjustment value (hereinafter also referred to as the current channel adjustment value) is stored in the sound RAM of the sound control board.
It should be noted that the settable channel adjustment values are not limited to those described above, and it would also be acceptable to allow more levels of channel adjustment values to be set so that volume adjustment can be made in more stages.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the speaker volume is in a changeable state, the speaker volume can be changed within a range of a plurality of predetermined steps by pressing the up or down key of the cross key 25. Specifically, the speaker volume can be increased stepwise until it reaches the maximum volume in the plurality of steps by pressing the up key, and the speaker volume can be decreased stepwise until it reaches the minimum volume in the plurality of steps by pressing the down key. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the speaker volume can be set within a range of eight steps from "0" to "7"("0" being the minimum volume and "7" being the maximum volume), but the range that can be set by operating the cross key 25 (hereinafter also referred to as the settable range) is preset to five steps from "3" to "7".
In addition, various data related to the speaker volume is stored in the sub-RAM 303 of the sub-control board 300.

The illumination control board controls the turning on and off of various lamps (front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL, board performance lamp GL, right hit notification lamp RL) based on commands from the sub-control board 300 (such as commands related to the execution of various performances and various suggestions). In addition, when the illumination control board receives a rotation operation detection signal output from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c based on the rotation operation of the operation dial 9a, or a press operation detection signal output from the press operation detection sensor 9d based on the press operation of the operation button 9b, it sends a specified command to the sub-control board 300.

The operation control board controls the driving of the drive motor M and the rotation motor RM based on commands from the sub-control board 300. When the drive motor M is driven, the prop device YS is displaced vertically within the range between the initial position and the movable position, and when the rotation motor RM is driven, the prop device YS rotates in the movable position (rotating clockwise or counterclockwise).

(Outline of power supply board 600)
The power supply board 600 supplies power to each board such as the main control board 100, the launch/payout control board 200, and the sub-control board 300. The power supply board 600 is provided with a backup power supply. In addition, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is provided with a power interruption detection circuit for detecting the voltage value of the power supplied from the power supply board 600. This power supply detection circuit judges that a power interruption has occurred when the voltage value of the supplied power falls below a predetermined value (for example, when the power switch 650 is turned off or an unexpected power interruption has occurred) and transmits a power interruption occurrence signal to the main control board 100. In addition, when the voltage value becomes greater than a predetermined value (for example, when the power switch 650 is turned on or when the power is restored from an unexpected power interruption), it judges that the power has been restored from the power interruption and stops transmitting the power interruption occurrence signal to the main control board 100.

When the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 detects a power interruption signal (a power interruption has occurred), it prohibits access to the main RAM 103, calculates the checksum of the main RAM 103 (used area and unused area) and sets a backup flag, and performs backup processing to retain various data stored in the memory area of the main RAM 103 (setting values, gaming machine status flag indicating the control status, checksum, backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game (number of first special charts reserved, number of second special charts reserved, execution phase data indicating the progress of special chart play, number of regular charts reserved, regular chart execution phase data indicating the progress of regular chart play), and game performance data). When the power interruption signal is no longer detected (power is restored), the checksum calculated when the power interruption occurred is compared with the checksum calculated when the power is restored, and the backup flag set when the power interruption occurred is checked to determine whether or not there is an inconsistency between the data stored in main RAM 103 when the power interruption occurred and the data stored in main RAM 103 when the power is restored (i.e., whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the above-mentioned backup process), and then the process when the power is restored is executed.

To prevent the processing when a power outage occurs from becoming complicated, the sub-control board 300 in this embodiment is not provided with a power outage detection circuit, and the sub-control board 300 does not perform the backup processing described above. Therefore, when power is restored after a power outage, the sub-CPU 301 controls the presentation based on the various commands sent from the main CPU 101, so that the appropriate presentation can be executed at that time.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 no longer detects the power interruption occurrence signal (recovery from power interruption), if a playable state or a setting change state described below is set, or if a setting confirmation state described below is set, at the end of that setting confirmation state, the main CPU 101 transmits an initial processing execution signal to the sub-control board 300 to execute an initial processing for stopping the reel performance device YS at its initial position. Then, when this initial processing execution signal is received, the sub-control board 300 executes the initial processing of the reel performance device YS.
Specifically, when this initial process is executed, the bonus effect device YS moves to a movable position and then moves to an initial position. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the time from the start to the end of the initial process is 25 seconds.

(Overview of Pachinko Machine P)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be described based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in this form of pachinko machine P, the special game and the normal game proceed in parallel. As the game state when these two games proceed, either a low probability game state (so-called non-variable state) or a high probability game state (so-called variable state) is set as a game state that combines either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, a game state is set to either a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a normal game state), or a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as a high-probability time-saving game state).

Here, the low probability gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot through a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is set to a predetermined value. Meanwhile, the high probability gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot through a jackpot lottery is set to a higher value than in the low probability gaming state. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot through a jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state than in the low probability gaming state.
Moreover, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 16b is less likely to open (i.e., the second start winning port 16 is less likely to be in an open state) and a game ball is less likely to enter the second start winning port 16. Moreover, the time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 16b is more likely to open (i.e., the second start winning port 16 is more likely to be in an open state) and a game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning port 16 than in the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, immediately after shipment from the factory or in the initial state after a reset, the normal game mode is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball that is launched by a launching device (not shown) and flows down the game area 12 enters the first start winning opening 15 or the second start winning opening 16, a lottery for a jackpot is held. If a jackpot is won in the lottery, the jackpot winning opening 18 is opened and a special game is played in which the game ball can be allowed to enter the jackpot winning opening 18, and the game state after the special game ends is set to a high probability time-saving game state.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first start winning hole 15. Also, the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big winning hole 18, pass through the gate 20, and enter the second start winning hole 16. During the normal game state, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left shot) so that the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, and during the high probability time-saving game state and special game, the player is made to shoot the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right shot) so that the game ball enters the big winning hole 18 or passes through the gate 20 and enters the second start winning hole 16.
Specifically, during the high probability time-saving game state and during special game play, a display is made on the performance display device 21 instructing the player to shoot a game ball toward the second game area 12b, and when the normal game state is set, a display is made on the performance display device 21 instructing the player to shoot a game ball toward the first game area 12a. Also, during the high probability time-saving game state and during special game play, the right hit notification lamp RL is turned on, and during the normal game state, the right hit notification lamp RL is turned off.

In addition, the jackpot lottery is conducted based on various random numbers obtained when the game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, and various tables stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random numbers.
Here, the pachinko machine P in this embodiment has, as random numbers used in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot determination random number used to determine a jackpot, a winning pattern random number used to determine the type of special pattern, as well as a variation mode number for determining the pattern of the above-mentioned variable presentation (hereinafter referred to as the variable presentation pattern), a reach group determination random number used to determine the variable pattern number, a reach mode determination random number, and a variable pattern random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the random number for determining a jackpot is a hardware random number built into the main control board 100. This random number for determining a jackpot is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes through one cycle, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
Furthermore, the random numbers used to determine the variable presentation pattern are not limited to the three types mentioned above; for example, other random numbers may be used in addition to these random numbers, or any one or more of these random numbers may be used.

When a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a random number value is obtained for each of the above-mentioned random numbers, and each random number value is stored in a reserved memory area of the main RAM 103.
This reserved memory area is composed of a first reserved memory area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as first special random number) obtained by the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15, and a second reserved memory area for storing each random number value (hereinafter referred to as second special random number) obtained by the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16. Each of these reserved memory areas is composed of a total of four memory sections, from the first memory section to the fourth memory section, and is capable of storing a total of four sets of first special random numbers and a total of four sets of second special random numbers.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15, the first special chart random number is stored in sequence from the first storage section of the first reserved memory area. For example, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 in a state where the first special chart random number is not stored in any storage section of the first reserved memory area, the first special chart random number obtained as a result of this is stored in the first storage section of the first reserved memory area. Also, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 in a state where the first special chart random number is stored in the first storage section of the first reserved memory area, the first special chart random number obtained as a result of this is stored in the second storage section of the first reserved memory area. In addition, in a state where the first special random number is stored in the first memory section and the second memory section of the first reserved memory area, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, the first special random number obtained as a result of this is stored in the third memory section of the first reserved memory area. In addition, in a state where the first special random number is stored in the first memory section to the third memory section of the first reserved memory area, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, the first special random number obtained as a result of this is stored in the fourth memory section of the first reserved memory area. In a state where the first special random number is stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the first reserved memory area, if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15, the first special random number related to this ball entry is not stored.

Similarly, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16, the second special random number is stored in order from the first storage section of the second reserved storage area. The specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special random number described above, so the explanation will be omitted.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the number of sets of first special chart random numbers stored in the first reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the first special chart reserved number) is stored in a first special chart reserved number counter (not specifically shown), and the number of sets of second special chart random numbers stored in the second reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the second special chart reserved number) is stored in a second special chart reserved number counter (not specifically shown).
In this specification, as described above, the storage of the first special chart random number and the second special chart random number in the reserved memory area is also referred to as "reserved" or "reserved memory", and the first special chart reserved number and the second special chart reserved number are simply referred to as the "reserved number".

In addition, the pachinko machine P of this embodiment has, as tables related to the jackpot lottery, a jackpot determination random number determination table 110, a winning pattern random number determination table 111, a reach group determination random number determination table 112, a reach mode determination random number determination table 113, and a variable pattern lottery table 114.
It should be noted that the tables related to the lottery for the big win are not limited to these, and in cases where it is necessary to make judgments or decisions based on random numbers, tables may be provided as appropriate.

The jackpot determination random number judgment table 110 is used to judge whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and is broadly divided into a low probability judgment table which is referenced in a low probability game state, and a high probability judgment table which is referenced in a high probability game state.
As shown in FIGS. 7(a) to (l), each of the low probability determination table and the high probability determination table is provided with six types according to the currently set setting values.
Specifically, the low probability judgment tables include a first low probability judgment table 110a which is referenced when the set value is "1", a second low probability judgment table 110b which is referenced when the set value is "2", a third low probability judgment table 110c which is referenced when the set value is "3", a fourth low probability judgment table 110d which is referenced when the set value is "4", a fifth low probability judgment table 110e which is referenced when the set value is "5", and a sixth low probability judgment table 110f which is referenced when the set value is "6".
The high probability judgment tables include a first high probability judgment table 110g which is referenced when the set value is "1", a second high probability judgment table 110h which is referenced when the set value is "2", a third high probability judgment table 110i which is referenced when the set value is "3", a fourth high probability judgment table 110j which is referenced when the set value is "4", a fifth high probability judgment table 110k which is referenced when the set value is "5", and a sixth high probability judgment table 110l which is referenced when the set value is "6".

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, one jackpot determination random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, depending on the setting value set in the pachinko machine P and the game state at the time when the jackpot lottery is performed, one of the jackpot determination random number judgment tables 110 described above is selected, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the obtained jackpot determination random number and the selected jackpot determination random number judgment table 110.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), according to the first low probability judgment table 110a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10205, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 10206 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this first low probability judgment table 110a is approximately 1/319.7.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), according to the second low probability judgment table 110b, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10208, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 10209 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this second low probability judgment table 110b is approximately 1/315.1.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), according to the third low probability judgment table 110c, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10212, it is judged as a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 10213 to 65535), it is judged as a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this third low probability judgment table 110c is approximately 1/309.1.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), according to the fourth low probability judgment table 110d, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10215, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 10216 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this fourth low probability judgment table 110d is approximately 1/304.8.

As shown in FIG. 7(e), according to the fifth low probability judgment table 110e, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10219, it is judged as a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 10220 to 65535), it is judged as a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this fifth low probability judgment table 110e is approximately 1/299.2.

As shown in FIG. 7(f), according to the sixth low probability judgment table 110f, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10223, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 10224 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this sixth low probability judgment table 110a is approximately 1 in 293.9.

As shown in FIG. 7(g), according to the first high probability judgment table 110g, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 11024, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 11025 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this first high probability judgment table 110g is 1/64.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(h), according to the second high probability judgment table 110h, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 11040, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 11041 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this second high probability judgment table 110h is approximately 1 in 63.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(i), according to the third high probability judgment table 110i, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 11057, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 11058 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this third high probability judgment table 110i is approximately 1 in 62.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(j), according to the fourth high probability judgment table 110j, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 11074, it is judged to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 11075 to 65535), it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this fourth high probability judgment table 110j is approximately 1/61.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(k), according to the fifth high probability judgment table 110k, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 11092, it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 11093 to 65535), it is determined to be a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this fifth high probability judgment table 110k is approximately 1/60.0.

As shown in FIG. 7(l), according to the sixth high probability judgment table 110l, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 11110, it is judged as a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number (0 to 10000, 11111 to 65535), it is judged as a miss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this sixth high probability judgment table 110l is approximately 1/59.0.

As described above, when comparing a high probability determination table and a low probability determination table that have the same associated setting values, the high probability determination table is set to have approximately five times the probability of winning a jackpot compared to the low probability determination table.

In addition, the jackpot determination random numbers that are determined to be jackpots in the low probability determination table are set to be included in the jackpot determination random numbers that are determined to be jackpots in the high probability determination table that is associated with the same set value as the low probability determination table. In other words, the jackpot determination random numbers that are determined to be jackpots in the low probability determination table will also be determined to be jackpots in the high probability determination table that is associated with the same set value.

The winning pattern random number determination table 111 is used to determine the type of special pattern, and as shown in Figures 8 (a) and (b), it includes a first start winning port determination table 111a which is referenced when a jackpot is won by the first special pattern random number, and a second start winning port determination table 111b which is referenced when a jackpot is won by the second special pattern random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, one winning symbol random number is obtained within a numerical range of 0 to 199. Then, when a jackpot is won by the above-mentioned jackpot lottery, either the first start winning port judgment table 111a or the second start winning port judgment table 111b is selected according to the start winning port into which the game ball entered, and the type of special symbol is determined based on the obtained winning symbol random number and the selected winning symbol random number judgment table 111.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, two types of special symbols (X1, X2) are provided as special symbols that are determined in the event of a jackpot win (hereafter referred to as jackpot symbols), and two types of special symbols (Y1, Y2) are provided as special symbols that are determined in the event of a miss (hereafter referred to as miss symbols).

As shown in FIG. 8(a), according to the first start winning gate determination table 111a, if the winning pattern random number is between 0 and 99, the special pattern X1 is determined, and if the winning pattern random number is between 100 and 199, the special pattern X2 is determined. In other words, in this first start winning gate determination table 111a, the probability that the special pattern X1 is determined and the probability that the special pattern X2 is determined are both 50%.

8(b), according to the second start winning gate judgment table 111b, when the winning pattern random number is 0 to 159, the special pattern X1 is determined, and when the winning pattern random number is 160 to 199, the special pattern X2 is determined. That is, in this second start winning gate judgment table 111b, the probability that the special pattern X1 is determined is 80%, and the probability that the special pattern X2 is determined is 20%.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the same jackpot symbol is determined for any winning symbol random number determination table 111, but this is not limited to this, and different jackpot symbols may be determined for each table.

In addition, if the lottery for the big win based on the first special random number results in a loss, the above-mentioned lottery based on the winning random number is not conducted, and the special pattern Y1 is determined as the losing pattern. In addition, in the case where the lottery for the big win based on the second special random number results in a loss, the above-mentioned lottery based on the winning random number is not conducted, and the special pattern Y2 is determined as the losing pattern.
In other words, the winning symbol random number determination table 111 is referenced only when a jackpot is won, and is not referenced when a loss occurs.

The reach group determination random number judgment table 112, the reach mode determination random number judgment table 113, and the variation pattern selection table 114 are tables used to determine the variation mode number and the variation pattern number for determining the variation performance pattern.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the special symbol is determined by the lottery for the big win as described above, a variation mode number and a variation pattern number for determining the variation performance pattern are determined based on the result of the determination, and a variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number and a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern number are generated. The generated variation mode command and variation pattern command are then transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 determines the specific form of the variation performance (for example, an image to be displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21) that notifies the result of the lottery for the big win based on the received variation mode command and variation pattern command. The variation mode command and the variation pattern command are commands used to determine the variation time and form of the variation performance.

The reach group determination random number judgment table 112 is for determining the group to which the reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 used for determining the variation mode number and the variation pattern number belongs. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for the big win is a miss, the type of group is determined by the reach group determination random number and the reach group determination random number judgment table 112 as a preliminary step in determining the variation mode number and the variation pattern number.
A plurality of reach group determination random number judgment tables 112 are provided for each game state, type of start winning port related to the judgment of the lottery for the big win (i.e., which start winning port the big win determination random number used to judge the lottery for the big win was obtained by the ball entering), and reserved number (first special symbol reserved number, second special symbol reserved number). Here, as shown in Fig. 9 (a) to (c), the reach group determination random number judgment table 112 selected when the game state is a non-time-saving game state and the lottery for the big win based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 is a miss, and the reach group determination random number judgment table 112 selected when the game state is a time-saving game state and the lottery for the big win based on the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 is a miss will be described.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning slot 15 or the second start winning slot 16, one reach group determination random number is obtained within the numerical range of 0 to 10006. Then, if the jackpot lottery results in a miss, a reach group determination random number judgment table 112 is selected according to the game state at the time the jackpot lottery is performed, the type of start winning slot, and the number of reserved balls, and the type of group is determined based on the obtained reach group determination random number and the selected reach group determination random number judgment table 112.

Specifically, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state and the result of the jackpot lottery based on the first special chart random number obtained by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning port 15 is a miss, if the number of first special charts reserved at the time of the lottery is 0 or 1, the first judgment table 112a is selected, and if the number of first special charts reserved at the time of the lottery is 2 or more, the second judgment table 112b is selected (see Figures 9 (a) and (b)).
In addition, when the game state is a time-saving game state and the result of the jackpot lottery based on the second special chart random number obtained by the game ball entering the second start winning port 16 is a miss, if the number of second special charts reserved at the time of the lottery is 0 to 3 (i.e., regardless of the number of second special charts reserved), the third judgment table 112c is selected (see Figure 9 (c)).

As shown in Figure 9 (a), according to the first judgment table 112a, if the reach group determination random number is 0 to 299, the "first group" is determined, if the reach group determination random number is 300 to 8999, the "second group" is determined, if the reach group determination random number is 9000 to 9899, the "fourth group" is determined, and if the reach group determination random number is 9900 to 10006, the "fifth group" is determined.
Also, as shown in Figure 9 (b), according to the second judgment table 112b, when the reach group determination random number is between 0 and 8999, the "second group" is determined, when the reach group determination random number is between 9000 and 9899, the "fourth group" is determined, and when the reach group determination random number is between 9900 and 10006, the "fifth group" is determined.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9 (c), according to the third judgment table 112c, when the reach group determination random number is between 0 and 7999, the "first group" is determined, when the reach group determination random number is between 8000 and 8999, the "third group" is determined, and when the reach group determination random number is between 9000 and 10006, the "fifth group" is determined.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 is determined without determining the group type. In other words, the reach group determination random number judgment table 112 is referenced only when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, and is not referenced when the result is a jackpot.

The reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 is used to determine the fluctuation mode number used to determine the fluctuation presentation pattern (the manner of fluctuation presentation, fluctuation time), as well as to determine the fluctuation pattern lottery table 114 used to determine the fluctuation pattern number described later.
This reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 is roughly divided into a judgment table for loss to be referred to when the result of the lottery for the jackpot is a loss, and a judgment table for big win to be referred to when the result of the lottery for the jackpot is a big win.

In addition, multiple loss judgment tables are provided for each type of group determined as described above. Here, as shown in Figures 10(a) to (e), we will explain the first group judgment table 113a, which is referenced when the "first group" is determined, the second group judgment table 113b, which is referenced when the "second group" is determined, the third group judgment table 113c, which is referenced when the "third group" is determined, the fourth group judgment table 113d, which is referenced when the "fourth group" is determined, and the fifth group judgment table 113e, which is referenced when the "fifth group" is determined.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, one reach mode determination random number is obtained within the numerical range of 0 to 2038. Then, when a group is determined by the above-mentioned group type lottery, a loss judgment table corresponding to this determined group type is selected, and a variation mode number and a variation pattern lottery table 114 are determined based on the obtained reach mode determination random number and the selected loss judgment table.

Specifically, for example, if the "first group" is determined by the lottery for group type described above, the first group judgment table 113a is selected, if the "second group" is determined, the second group judgment table 113b is selected, if the "third group" is determined, the third group judgment table 113c is selected, if the "fourth group" is determined, the fourth group judgment table 113d is selected, and if the "fifth group" is determined, the fifth group judgment table 113e is selected (see Figures 10(a) to (e)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10(a), according to the first group judgment table 113a, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038 (i.e., regardless of the value of the reach mode determination random number), a variation mode number of "00H" (alphanumeric characters with "H" at the end are written in hexadecimal; the same applies below) is determined, and the first variation table 114a is selected.
Also, as shown in Figure 10 (b), according to the judgment table 113b for the second group, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038, the variation mode number "00H" is determined and the second variation table 114b is selected.
Also, as shown in Figure 10 (c), according to the judgment table 113c for the third group, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038, the variation mode number "00H" is determined and the third variation table 114c is selected.
Also, as shown in Figure 10 (d), according to the judgment table 113d for the fourth group, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 2038, the variation mode number "01H" is determined and the fourth variation table 114d is selected.
10(e), according to the fifth group judgment table 113e, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 1799, the variation mode number "02H" is determined and the fifth variation table 114e is selected. When the reach mode determination random number is between 1800 and 2038, the variation mode number "03H" is determined and the fifth variation table 114e is selected.

In addition, multiple jackpot determination tables are provided for each game state when a jackpot is won (i.e., when the jackpot is drawn), the type of starting winning slot related to the determination of the jackpot drawing, and the type of jackpot pattern determined in the event of a jackpot.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11(a)-(c), the following jackpot judgment tables are provided: a first jackpot judgment table 113f, which is referred to when the special pattern X1 or X2 is determined based on the first special pattern random number obtained by the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 in a non-time-saving game state or the second special pattern random number obtained by the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16; a second jackpot judgment table 113g, which is referred to when the special pattern X1 or X2 is determined based on the first special pattern random number obtained by the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 in a time-saving game state; and a third jackpot judgment table 113h, which is referred to when the special pattern X1 or X2 is determined based on the second special pattern random number obtained by the entry of a game ball into the second start winning port 16 in a time-saving game state.

When a jackpot is won and the type of special symbol is determined, the game state at the time of the jackpot is won, the type of starting winning slot (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number), and the jackpot determination table corresponding to the determined type of special symbol are selected, and the variation mode number and variation pattern selection table 114 are determined based on the obtained reach mode determination random number and the selected jackpot determination table, in the same way as the determination based on the above-mentioned loss determination table.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won based on the first or second special random number in a non-time-saving game state and the special pattern X1 or X2 is determined, the first jackpot judgment table 113f is selected, when a jackpot is won based on the first special random number in a time-saving game state and the special pattern X1 or X2 is determined, the second jackpot judgment table 113g is selected, and when a jackpot is won based on the second special random number in a time-saving game state and the special pattern X1 or X2 is determined, the third jackpot judgment table 113h is selected (see Figures 11 (a) to (c)).

11(a), according to the first big win judgment table 113f, when the reach mode determination random number is 0 to 199, the variation mode number "01H" is determined and the 30th variation table 114f is selected. When the reach mode determination random number is 200 to 1299, the variation mode number "02H" is determined and the 31st variation table 114g is selected. When the reach mode determination random number is 1300 to 2038, the variation mode number "03H" is determined and the 32nd variation table 114h is selected.
Also, as shown in Figure 11 (b), according to the second jackpot determination table 113g, when the reach mode determination random number is between 0 and 999, the fluctuation mode number "02H" is determined and the 31st fluctuation table 114g is selected, and when the reach mode determination random number is between 1000 and 2038, the fluctuation mode number "03H" is determined and the 32nd fluctuation table 114h is selected.
11(c), according to the third jackpot determination table 113h, when the reach mode determination random number is 0 to 999, the variation mode number of "A2H" is determined and the 31st variation table 114g is selected, and when the reach mode determination random number is 1000 to 2038, the variation mode number of "A3H" is determined and the 32nd variation table 114h is selected. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variation mode numbers of "A2H" and "A3H" are determined only when the jackpot is won based on the second special pattern random number in the time-saving game state and the special pattern X1 or X2 is determined.

The variation pattern lottery table 114 is provided for determining the variation pattern number used to determine the variation performance pattern (variation performance mode, variation time), and multiple tables are provided.
Here, as shown in Figures 12(a) to (h), we will explain the first change table 114a, the second change table 114b, the third change table 114c, the fourth change table 114d, and the fifth change table 114e, which are determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, and the 30th change table 114f, the 31st change table 114g, and the 32nd change table 114h, which are determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, one fluctuation pattern random number is obtained within the numerical range of 0 to 249. Then, a fluctuation pattern number is determined based on the obtained fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern lottery table 114 determined together with the above-mentioned fluctuation mode number.
For example, as shown in Fig. 12(a), according to the first fluctuation table 114a, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249 (i.e., regardless of the value of the fluctuation pattern random number), the fluctuation pattern number "00H" is determined. Also, as shown in Fig. 12(d), according to the fourth fluctuation table 114d, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249, the fluctuation pattern number "05H" is determined.

Also, as shown in Fig. 12(g), according to the 31st fluctuation table 114g, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249, the fluctuation pattern number "A6H" is determined. Also, as shown in Fig. 12(h), according to the 32nd fluctuation table 114h, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 89, the fluctuation pattern number "A6H" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is 90 to 249, the fluctuation pattern number "A7H" is determined.
Similarly, a predetermined variation pattern number is determined in correspondence with a variation pattern random number by other variation pattern tables 114 (see FIG. 12).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the variation starts (i.e., when the variation display of the special pattern described later starts (when the variation performance starts)), the jackpot lottery is held as described above, and when the jackpot lottery is held, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery, the game status at the time of the jackpot lottery and the number of reserved balls (number of reserved first special patterns, number of reserved second special patterns), etc. As described above, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are used to determine the variation performance pattern, and the variation mode number and the variation pattern number determine the mode and time of the variation performance. Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variation performance is divided into a first half and a second half. The mode and time of the first half of the variation performance are determined by the variation mode number, and the mode and time of the second half of the variation performance are determined by the variation pattern number.

Next, the process of determining the variable time of the variable presentation in the special chart game and the control of the special game will be explained.
The pachinko machine P of this embodiment is equipped with a variable time determination table 115, a special electric device operation table 116, and a game status setting table 117, etc., as tables for performing the above-mentioned determination processing and controlling special games.

The variable time determination table 115 is used to determine the variable time.
The pachinko machine P in this embodiment is equipped with, as the fluctuation time determination table 115, a first fluctuation time determination table 115a in which the fluctuation time of the first half of the fluctuation performance corresponding to each fluctuation mode number (hereinafter referred to as the first half fluctuation time) is determined, and a second fluctuation time determination table 115b in which the fluctuation time of the second half of the fluctuation performance corresponding to each fluctuation pattern number (hereinafter referred to as the second half fluctuation time) is determined (see Figures 13 (a) and (b)).

Then, when the fluctuation mode number is determined, the corresponding first half fluctuation time is determined based on the determined fluctuation mode number and the first fluctuation time determination table 115a. Also, when the fluctuation pattern number is determined, the corresponding second half fluctuation time is determined based on the determined fluctuation pattern number and the second fluctuation time determination table 115b. Then, the sum of the first half fluctuation time and the second half fluctuation time thus determined corresponds to the entire fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance that notifies the result of the lottery for the big win.
Based on the change time determined as described above, the change performance is performed on the performance display device 21, and the special pattern display device (first special pattern display device 30 or second special pattern display device 31) changes and displays the special pattern. Specifically, if the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first starting winning hole 15, the first special pattern display device 30 flashes during the determined change time, and if the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning hole 16, the second special pattern display device 31 flashes during the determined change time. After the change time has elapsed, the determined special pattern is displayed stationary.

For example, if the determined fluctuation mode number is "03H" and the fluctuation pattern number is "06H", then a first half fluctuation time of "20 seconds" is determined corresponding to the fluctuation mode number "03H", and a second half fluctuation time of "45 seconds" is determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number "06H". The sum of these values, "65 seconds (= 20 seconds + 45 seconds)", is the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the "00H" fluctuation mode number has a first half fluctuation time of "0 seconds", and when this fluctuation mode number is determined, the first half of the fluctuation performance is not executed, and only the second half of the fluctuation performance is executed based on the determined fluctuation pattern number. In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the fluctuation mode number "00H" is determined only when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss (see FIG. 10 and FIG. 11), so when this fluctuation mode number is determined, a miss is always displayed in the fluctuation performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, when the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined, a variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number and a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern number are generated and transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Then, in the sub-control board 300, the mode of the variation performance is determined based on the received variation mode command and variation pattern command. Specifically, the mode of the first half of the variation performance is determined based on the variation mode command, and the mode of the second half of the variation performance is determined based on the variation pattern command.
Regarding the manner of the variable performance, rather than determining the manner of the first half of the variable performance based on the variable mode command and determining the manner of the second half of the variable performance based on the variable pattern command, the manner of the first half of the variable performance may be determined based on the variable pattern command and the manner of the second half of the variable performance may be determined based on the variable mode command.
Also, instead of dividing the variation performance into a first half and a second half, it is possible to divide it into more parts and determine the appearance of each part based on a variation mode command or a variation pattern command.
In addition, the mode of the variation performance may be determined based on not only the variation mode command and the variation pattern command, but also other commands. Also, the mode of the variation performance may be determined based on only either the variation mode command or the variation pattern command.

The special electric device operation table 116 is for controlling the special game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and is referenced to operate the jackpot opening solenoid 18c during the execution of the special game. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 14(a) and (b), the special electric device operation table 116 is provided with a first operation table 116a that is referenced when the special symbol X1 is determined, and a second operation table 116b that is referenced when the special symbol X2 is determined.

Specifically, when the special symbol X1 is determined, a special game is executed by referring to the first operation table 116a as shown in Fig. 14(a). According to this first operation table 116a, ten round games are executed, which end when either the big prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or ten game balls enter the big prize opening 18. During each round game, the big prize opening 18 is opened only once, and the time during which the big prize opening 18 is closed between each round game (i.e., the interval time) is set to 2.0 seconds.
In this special game, the player can win a predetermined number of prize balls with an expected value.

In addition, when the special symbol X2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 14(b), a special game is executed by referring to the second operation table 116b. According to this second operation table 116b, four round games are executed in the same manner as the first operation table 116a. In addition, the number of times the big prize opening 18 is opened and closed and the interval time during each round game are set to the same contents as those of the first operation table 116a.
In this special game, the player can win prize balls with a smaller expected value than in the special game when the special symbol X1 is determined.

The game state setting table 117 is for setting the game state after the special game ends when the special game is executed.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, regardless of whether the special symbol X1 or the special symbol X2 is determined, the game state after the special game is ended is set to a high probability time-saving game state. In addition, the number of times the high probability game state continues (hereinafter referred to as the high probability number) and the number of times the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter referred to as the time-saving number) are both set to 100 times. That is, after the special game is ended, the high probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the lottery for the jackpot is derived 100 times. In addition, if a jackpot is won during the continuation of this game state, the high probability number and the time-saving number are set again. Therefore, if a high probability time-saving game state is set after the special game is ended, and if no jackpot is won during the continuation of this game state and all the results of the lottery for the 100 times are lost, the game state will be changed to a normal game state.

The game state after the special game ends may be determined based on the type of special symbol determined by the jackpot lottery. For example, if either special symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the game state after the special game ends may be set to a high-probability time-saving game state, and if either the other is determined, the game state may be set to a normal game state or a game state that combines a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

Next, the process related to the regular game will be described.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a launching device (not shown) and flowing down the game area 12 passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is held to determine whether or not to activate the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and open the movable piece 16b. If a winning ball is selected by the lottery for the normal symbol, the movable piece 16b opens and the second start winning opening 16 is opened, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 16.
The selection of this normal symbol is carried out based on a winning determination random number obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and a winning determination random number determination table 118 that is stored in the main ROM 102 and is used to determine this random number.

When the game ball passes through the gate 20, the above-mentioned winning random number is obtained, and the random number is stored in the general map reserve memory area of the main RAM 103, with a maximum of four numbers. Specifically, this general map reserve memory area is composed of a total of four memory areas, from the first memory area to the fourth memory area, and the winning random numbers are stored starting from the first memory area in the order of passing through the gate 20. Also, if winning random numbers have already been stored in several memory areas, the winning random number is stored in the memory area with the smallest number among the empty memory areas. If four winning random numbers have already been stored in the general map reserve memory area, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20, the winning random number related to this passage is not stored in the general map reserve memory area.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the winning random number is a hardware random number built into the main control board 100. This winning random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes through one cycle, and the start value is changed every time the system is reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the number of winning determination random numbers stored in the regular number reserve memory area (hereinafter referred to as the regular number reserve number) is stored in a regular number reserve number counter (not specifically shown).
In this specification, as described above, the storage of the winning determination random number in the regular number reserve memory area is also referred to as "regular number reserve."

The winning determination random number judgment table 118 is used to judge whether or not a winning combination has been selected by drawing normal symbols, and as shown in Figs. 16(a) and (b), it includes a non-time-saving judgment table 118a that is referenced in a non-time-saving game state, and a time-saving judgment table 118b that is referenced in a time-saving game state.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the gate 20, one winning determination random number is obtained within a numerical range of 0 to 65535. If the game state at the time when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed is a non-time-saving game state, the non-time-saving judgment table 118a is selected, and the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the winning determination random number obtained and the selected non-time-saving judgment table 118a. If the game state at the time when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed is a time-saving game state, the time-saving judgment table 118b is selected, and the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the winning determination random number obtained and the selected time-saving judgment table 118b.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the special game and the normal game proceed in parallel, and even during the special game that is executed upon winning the jackpot, the normal symbol is drawn based on the game ball passing through the gate 20. During the special game, the non-time-saving judgment table 118a is selected, and the normal symbol is drawn based on the table (see FIG. 16(a)).

According to the non-time-saving judgment table 118a, a win is determined when the winning determination random number is 1, and a loss is determined when the winning determination random number is other than this (0, 2 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this non-time-saving judgment table 118a is 1/65536.
According to the time-saving judgment table 118b, a winning decision is made when the winning decision random number is between 1 and 65000, and a losing decision is made when the winning decision random number is other than this (0, 65001 to 65535). Therefore, the probability of winning in this time-saving judgment table 118b is 65000/65536, or approximately 99/100.
If the normal symbol is selected by lottery, a winning symbol is determined, and if it is not selected, a losing symbol is determined.

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment also includes a normal symbol change pattern determination table 119 and a second start winning hole opening control table 120 as tables related to the control of the change in the normal symbol and the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table 119 is for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol. The variation pattern of the normal symbol is associated with the variation time of the normal symbol. Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the gate 20 and the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the variation pattern of the normal symbol (i.e., the variation time of the normal symbol) is determined based on this normal symbol variation pattern determination table 119.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 17, when the game state is in a non-time-saving game state or during a special game, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be 13 seconds, and when the game state is in a time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be 0.6 seconds. Then, when the normal symbol variation time is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 (see Fig. 3) is displayed flashing during the determined normal symbol variation time. Then, when the normal symbol lottery results in a winning symbol being determined, the normal symbol display device 32 is turned on, and when the lottery results in a losing symbol being determined, the normal symbol display device 32 is turned off.

In addition, the second start winning opening opening control table 120 is referenced to control the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second start winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 is turned on, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 opens and closes in a manner determined by the second start winning hole opening control table 120. Specifically, when the game state is a non-time-saving game state or during a special game, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning hole solenoid 16c is energized for 0.2 seconds (=0.2 seconds x 1 time), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. Also, when the game state is a time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 18, the start winning hole solenoid 16c is energized for 5.6 seconds (=2.8 seconds x 2 times), so that the movable piece 16b of the second start winning hole 16 is opened for a total of 5.6 seconds.

As described above, the conditions for opening and closing the second start winning port 16 are set for both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, and the contents of these conditions make it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning port 16 in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. In other words, in the time-saving game state, as long as game balls pass through the gate 20, regular symbol drawings are performed one after another and the second start winning port 16 is frequently opened, so that players can get a chance to win a jackpot while minimizing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses.

(Outline of processing when power is restored in the main control board 100)
As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine P goes from off to on (recovers from a power outage), the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 sets one of the control states depending on the control state it was in before the power was turned off (just before the power outage occurred), the on or off state of the setting switch 108 at the time the power was turned on (when the power outage is restored), the on or off state of the RAM clear switch 109, the on or off state of the main frame open detection sensor 2a (opening or closing of the main frame 2), whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the backup process of the main RAM 103 performed at the time the power was turned off (hereinafter referred to as a backup abnormality), and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103 (hereinafter referred to as a RAM abnormality).

(Occurrence and release of backup abnormality and RAM abnormality in the main control board 100)
Here, the occurrence and release of backup abnormalities and RAM abnormalities in the main control board 100 will be described.
When power is restored, if there is an inconsistency between the data stored in main RAM 103 at the time the power outage occurred and the data stored in main RAM 103 at the time the power outage was restored, it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred, and if the above-mentioned inconsistency does not occur, it is determined that no backup abnormality has occurred.
This backup abnormality is highly likely to occur due to a temporary cause (for example, a failure to read or store data due to a temporary abnormality in one of the devices, etc.) In addition, when a new main ROM 102, main RAM 103, etc. are installed and the power supply of the pachinko machine P is turned on, a backup abnormality is bound to occur because the backup process has not been executed before that.

Moreover, if it becomes impossible to read or write data within the used area of the main RAM 103, it is determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, only the used area is judged to have a RAM abnormality, and if data cannot be read or written in the non-used area, it is not judged that a RAM abnormality has occurred. It is also possible to judge whether a RAM abnormality has occurred not only in the used area, but also in both the used area and the non-used area. Then, when set in this way, if data cannot be read or written in at least one of the used area and the non-used area, it is judged that a RAM abnormality has occurred, and the processing described later (initialization processing in the event of an abnormality, setting of a game stop state) may be performed.
This RAM abnormality is highly likely to occur due to an abnormality in the hardware itself, such as chip damage, and requires replacement or repair of the main RAM 103.

If a backup abnormality occurs when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of the backup abnormality is set. If a RAM abnormality occurs when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of the RAM abnormality is set. If a backup abnormality and a RAM abnormality occur simultaneously, an abnormality initialization process is executed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of the RAM abnormality is set, with priority given to the backup abnormality.
As will be described later, in the abnormality initialization process executed when a game stop state is set, all data stored in the main RAM 103 (i.e., all data stored in the used area and the unused area, specifically, setting values, game machine status flags, checksums, backup flags, error information, various data related to the progress of the game, and game performance data) is cleared.

When a game-stop state is set based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality, the game will be set to the changed setting state when the power is restored by satisfying the setting change conditions for setting the control state to the changed setting state (specifically, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, and the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on), and then the gameable state is set by turning off the setting switch 108. On the other hand, if the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the game will remain in the stopped game state.
Furthermore, if a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, the setting change state is set by satisfying the setting change conditions in a state where the RAM abnormality is resolved when power is restored (a state where the main RAM 103 has been replaced or repaired and there is no RAM abnormality), and then the playable state is set by turning off the setting switch 108. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality is not resolved when power is restored or if the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the game will remain in the game stop state.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when a play-stop state is set due to the occurrence of a backup abnormality or RAM abnormality, the playable state is not directly set even if the power is turned back on, but the playable state is set (transition to the playable state) via the setting change state that is set by turning the power on with the setting change conditions satisfied.

(Setting of control state when power is restored)
Hereinafter, the control state that is set when power is restored will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20.
(1) When the power is restored after the power interruption, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in Fig. 19, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power interruption was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, the control state immediately before the power interruption is set when the power interruption is restored. In other words, the control state when the power interruption is restored remains the control state that existed immediately before the power interruption.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state and a special game was in progress, the special game will be resumed when the power is restored.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in principle, the machine remains in the setting change state or setting confirmation state only while the setting switch 108 is on. In the above-mentioned case, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was the setting change state, the setting change state is set when the power is restored, and if the control state immediately before the power interruption was the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is set when the power is restored, but since the setting switch 108 is off, the playable state is set (changed to the playable state) immediately after the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set.

(2) When the power is restored after the power outage, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19, when the power outage is restored, the control state immediately before the power outage is set regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state and a special game was in progress, the special game will be resumed when the power is restored.
In this case, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set when power is restored, the playable state will not be set immediately thereafter.

(3) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality occurs, and no RAM abnormality occurs In this case, as shown in Fig. 19, if the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state or a setting confirmation state, normal initialization processing is performed based on the RAM clear switch 109 being on when the power is restored, and the playable state is set. Also, if the control state immediately before the power failure was a setting change state, normal initialization processing is performed when power is restored, and the setting change state is set. Also, if the control state immediately before the power failure was a play stop state, the play stop state is set when power is restored.
As will be described later, in the normal initialization process that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the data stored in the second to fourth areas in the use area of the main RAM 103 (i.e., checksum, backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game) are cleared. Therefore, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state, and a hold was stored or a variable display of special or normal symbols was in progress, the stored hold is cleared and the variable display of special or normal symbols is reset. If a special game was in progress, the special game is also reset.
Furthermore, when the control state immediately before the power outage occurred was a setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value is not cleared in the normal initialization process described above, so that the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage (the setting value stored in main RAM 103) is maintained as is even in the setting change state set after the power outage is restored. Then, the playable state is set immediately after the setting change state is set. This ends the setting change state, and the setting value being changed is confirmed, as described below.

(4) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality occurs, and no RAM abnormality occurs. In this case as well, as shown in Fig. 19, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a playable state and a setting confirmation state, normal initialization processing is performed and the playable state is set when power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a setting change state, normal initialization processing is performed and the setting change state is set when power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a play stopped state, the play stopped state is set when power is restored.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, and if a reserved symbol was stored or if a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored reserved symbol is cleared and the variable display of the special symbol or normal symbol is reset. If a special game was being played, the special game is also reset.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage will be maintained even in the setting change state set after the power outage is restored. And since the playable state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set and the setting change state does not end, the setting value being changed is not finalized at this point.

(5) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, the control state immediately before the power outage is set when power is restored.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state and a special game was in progress, the special game will be resumed when the power is restored.
Also, the playable state is set immediately after the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set.

(6) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in Figure 19, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a playable state or a setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is set when power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a setting change state, the setting change state is set when power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a play stopped state, the play stopped state is set when power is restored.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state and a special game was in progress, a setting confirmation state is set when the power is restored, and then, when the setting switch 108 is turned off, the special game is resumed.
Also, the playable state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set.

(7) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred In this case, as shown in Fig. 19, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a playable state and a setting confirmation state, normal initialization processing is performed and the playable state is set when power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a setting change state, normal initialization processing is performed and the setting change state is set when power is restored. Also, if the control state immediately before the power interruption was a play stopped state, the play stopped state is set when power is restored.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, and if a reserved symbol was stored or if a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored reserved symbol is cleared and the variable display of the special symbol or normal symbol is reset. If a special game was being played, the special game is also reset.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage is maintained even in the setting change state set after the power outage is restored. Then, the playable state is set immediately after the setting change state is set. This ends the setting change state, and the setting value being changed is confirmed.

(8) When power is restored after the power outage, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state, a setting confirmation state, or a play-stop state, when power is restored after the power outage, normal initialization processing is executed and the setting change state is set.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, and if a reserved symbol was stored or if a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored reserved symbol is cleared and the variable display of the special symbol or normal symbol is reset. If a special game was being played, the special game is also reset.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power outage was a setting change state and the setting value was being changed, the setting value being changed immediately before the power outage will be maintained even in the setting change state set after the power outage is restored. And since the playable state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set and the setting change state does not end, the setting value being changed is not finalized at this point.

(9) When power is restored, a backup abnormality occurs but no RAM abnormality occurs (except when the setting switch 108, the RAM clear switch 109, and the main body frame open detection sensor 2a are all on).
That is, when power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred If the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, if the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, then when the power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play-stop state based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality is set (see Figure 19), regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play-stop state (see Figure 19)

(10) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, but no RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and the setting change state is set.
In addition, if the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, and if a reserved symbol was stored or if a special symbol or normal symbol was being displayed in a variable manner, the stored reserved symbol is cleared and the variable display of the special symbol or normal symbol is reset. If a special game was being played, the special game is also reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in this case (when a backup abnormality occurs when the power is restored), the setting value is also cleared in the abnormality initialization process executed when the power is restored. Therefore, when the control state immediately before the power failure is a setting change state and the setting value is being changed, in the setting change state set after the power is restored, the setting value being changed immediately before the power failure (the setting value stored in the main RAM 103) is not maintained, and the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed to a setting value ("1" in this embodiment) that is predetermined as an initial value. Note that the playable state is not set immediately after the setting change state is set, and the setting change state does not end, so the setting value is not determined at this point.

(11) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the presence or absence of a RAM abnormality is determined when a backup abnormality occurs when power is restored and when normal initialization processing is performed when power is restored. Therefore, when normal initialization processing is not performed when power is restored and no backup abnormality occurs, it may not be possible to discover (detect) a RAM abnormality even if one has occurred. In this case, even if a RAM abnormality has occurred, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred, and the control state at the time of power restoration is set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned (1).

(12) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality is present but this is not detected, the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned (2), as if no RAM abnormality had occurred, even if a RAM abnormality had occurred.

(13) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, only the used area is judged to have a RAM abnormality, and if data cannot be read or written in the unused area, it is not judged that a RAM abnormality has occurred. If it is not judged that a RAM abnormality has occurred, it is assumed that no RAM abnormality has occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned (3).

(14) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if it is determined that a RAM abnormality has not occurred as described above, it is assumed that a RAM abnormality has not occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in the case (4) described above.

(15) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality has occurred but this fact cannot be detected, the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned (5), as if no RAM abnormality had occurred, even if a RAM abnormality had occurred.

(16) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if a RAM abnormality is present but this is not detected, the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned (6), as if no RAM abnormality had occurred, even if a RAM abnormality had occurred.

(17) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if it is determined that a RAM abnormality has not occurred as described above, it is assumed that a RAM abnormality has not occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in the case (7) described above.

(18) When power is restored, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, no backup abnormality has occurred, and a RAM abnormality has occurred. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power failure was a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set.
Furthermore, if it is determined that a RAM abnormality has not occurred as described above, it is assumed that a RAM abnormality has not occurred, and the control state at the time of power recovery is set in the same manner as in the case (8) described above.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, if a RAM abnormality occurs, the game stop state will be set in priority to the setting change state, even if the setting change conditions are met.

(19) When a backup abnormality and a RAM abnormality have occurred when power is restored. In other words, when power is restored, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, if the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, if the setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, if the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, If there is a RAM abnormality, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, the setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is off, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred; if there is a setting switch 108 is off, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred; if there is a setting switch 108 is on, the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, a backup abnormality has occurred, and no RAM abnormality has occurred, regardless of whether the control state immediately before the power outage was a playable state, a setting confirmation state, or a play stopped state, when the power is restored, an abnormality initialization process is executed, and a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set in preference to a play stopped state based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality (see Figure 20).

Then, when the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is set by executing the above-mentioned processes (1) to (19), the main information display device 105 displays the setting value stored in the main RAM 103. When the playable state is set, the main information display device 105 displays game performance display information based on the game performance data stored in the main RAM 103. When the game stop state is set, the main information display device 105 displays a code indicating that the game stop state has been set.
In addition, if the playable state is set immediately after the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is set, the setting value will be displayed for a moment on the main information display device 105, and then the game performance display information will be displayed in conjunction with the setting of the playable state.

In addition, if the setting confirmation state or setting change state is set based on the setting switch 108 being on, when the setting switch 108 is subsequently turned off, a process is executed to switch the currently set setting confirmation state or setting change state to a playable state, and the playable state is set. Then, by setting the playable state, the display on the main information display device 105 also switches to the corresponding content.

During the setting change state, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed by one step each time the push button 109a is pressed and the RAM clear switch 109 is turned on, provided that the body frame opening detection sensor 2a detects the opening of the body frame 2. Specifically, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed to a value incremented by one.
For example, if the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is "2," and the push button 109a is pressed while the body frame 2 is open, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 will change to "3." Each time the push button 109a is pressed while the body frame 2 is open, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 will change from "4" to "5" to "6," and after "6" it will change to "1." Each time the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 is changed, the display of the setting value on the main information display device 105 will also change.
Then, when the setting switch 108 is turned off, it becomes impossible to change the setting value stored in the main RAM 103. That is, the setting value stored in the main RAM 103 at this point in time is confirmed as the new setting value.

(Processing when an abnormal setting occurs)
When noise or the like occurs in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a situation may occur in which the setting value stored in the usage area of the main RAM 103 is rewritten to an abnormal value (for example, a value smaller than "1" or a value larger than "6"). When a situation occurs in which the stored setting value becomes an abnormal value (hereinafter also referred to as a setting value abnormality), it is not possible to draw a jackpot based on the appropriate setting value, which may seriously affect the progress of the game.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value abnormality determination process to determine whether or not a setting value abnormality has occurred at the time when the lottery for the jackpot or the lottery for the normal symbol is performed during a playable state. If it is determined in this setting value abnormality determination process that a setting value abnormality has occurred, the abnormality initialization process described above is performed, and a game stop state based on the occurrence of the setting value abnormality is set.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, since the drawing of the next big win and the variable display of the special symbol are not performed during the execution of the special game, the setting value abnormality determination process based on the drawing of the big win can be performed only when the special game is not being executed. On the other hand, the drawing of the normal symbol is performed both when the special game is not being executed and when it is being executed, so the setting value abnormality determination process based on the drawing of the normal symbol can be performed both when the special game is not being executed and when it is being executed.

In the case where a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, when power is restored, the setting change state is set by satisfying the setting change conditions, and then the playable state is set by turning off the setting switch 108. On the other hand, when the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the game remains in the game stop state.
In other words, when a play-stop state is set based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, just as when a play-stop state is set based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality or RAM abnormality, the playable state is not directly set even if the power is turned back on, but the playable state is set via the setting change state that is set by turning the power on while the setting change conditions are satisfied.

(Normal initialization process, abnormal initialization process, clear process)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a setting value abnormality, an abnormality initialization process is executed. In this abnormality initialization process, as described above, all data stored in the main RAM 103 (all data stored in the use area and the non-use area, specifically, the setting value, the gaming machine status flag, the checksum, the backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game, and the gaming performance data) are cleared.
In addition, when a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a setting value abnormality, the setting change state may then be set, and "1" may be automatically stored in the usage area of main RAM 103 as the default setting value.

Furthermore, when power is restored, if the RAM clear switch 109 is on and a control state other than the game stop state (playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state) is set, normal initialization processing is executed. In this normal initialization processing, as described above, the data stored in the second to fourth areas in the usage area of the main RAM 103 (checksum, backup flag, error information, various data related to the progress of the game) are cleared.
Furthermore, when power is restored, if the RAM clear switch 109 is off and the playable state or the setting confirmation state is set, a clear process is executed to clear a part of the main RAM 103. In this clear process, the data stored in the second and third areas in the usage area of the main RAM 103 (i.e., the checksum, backup flag, and error information) is cleared.

(Outline of various controls when a game stop state is set based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, a backup abnormality, or a RAM abnormality)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the special game, normal game, or special game is being played in a playable state, noise or the like may cause a set value abnormality, causing a game stop state to be set based on the occurrence of a set value abnormality. In addition, in the above-mentioned case, for example, a momentary power outage (i.e., a momentary blackout) may occur, and when the power outage is restored (when the power is restored), a backup abnormality or RAM abnormality may occur in the main control board 100, causing a game stop state to be set based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality or RAM abnormality.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the game remains in a stopped state due to the above-mentioned setting being performed based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, a backup abnormality, or a RAM abnormality, the special game, normal game, and special game that were being performed during the playable state before the game stopped state was set are not performed, and the game does not progress.

Specifically, when the game is in a playable state and the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control described later is a pre-activation warning state, an activation warning state, or an activation notice state, when the operating handle 5 is rotated, the launching and dispensing control board 200 controls the launching of game balls. On the other hand, in a game stop state, even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, the launching and dispensing control board 200 does not control the launching of game balls.
In other words, when the game is in a playable state and the state regarding the differential ball operation stop control described below is the pre-activation warning state, the activation warning state, or the activation notice state, the game ball will be launched when the operating handle 5 is rotated, but in a game-stopped state, the game ball will not be launched even if the operating handle 5 is rotated.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when each control state (playable state, setting confirmation state, setting change state, game stop state) is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 transmits a state setting command indicating that each control state has been set to the launch/payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300. This allows the launch/payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300 to grasp the set control state.

In addition, in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 is configured not to detect the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, or the passage of a game ball through the gate 20. As a result, even if a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a lottery for a jackpot based on the ball is not performed, and even if a game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal symbol is not performed based on the passage, and new prize balls, new reserved memories of special random numbers, and new reserved memories of normal random numbers are not generated.
In addition, if the display of changing special patterns, the display of changing normal patterns, or a special game is being executed during a playable state, when a game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the display of changing special patterns, the display of changing normal patterns, and the execution of the special game.
In this manner, in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs the above-mentioned control, so that the game does not progress.

In addition, when the game is in a playable state and in a pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notice state, when a game ball enters the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the transmission of a winning signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500 during the period from a predetermined start point after the ball enters (for example, the start point of the changing display of the special pattern) to a predetermined end point (for example, the point when a predetermined time (for example, 3000 ms) has passed from the predetermined start point). In addition, when the machine is in a playable state and in the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notice state, if a jackpot is won, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the transmission of a jackpot signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500 from a predetermined start point after the jackpot is won (for example, the start point of a special game based on the jackpot) to a predetermined end point (for example, the end point of a special game based on the jackpot is won).
This makes it possible for devices external to the pachinko machine P to grasp the changing display of special patterns and winning of a jackpot based on the ball entering the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16.

In contrast, when the game is stopped, since the game does not progress as described above, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 also restricts the control of transmitting the above-mentioned winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
For example, if the game is stopped while the winning signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the variable display of the special symbols, and the main CPU 101 is unable to stop the ongoing transmission of the winning signal, and the winning signal remains in the transmitted state. Also, if the game is stopped when the winning signal is not being transmitted, even if a game ball subsequently enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the ball, and the main CPU 101 is unable to start transmitting the winning signal.
Furthermore, if the game is stopped while the jackpot signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the execution of the special game, and the main CPU 101 is unable to stop the transmission of the jackpot signal being transmitted, so the jackpot signal remains in the transmitted state. If the game is stopped while the jackpot signal is not being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not start the special game thereafter, and therefore the main CPU 101 does not start the transmission of the jackpot signal.

In addition, when the game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 displays an error code on the main information display device 105, sends a state setting command (hereinafter also referred to as a game stop command) to the sub-control board 300 indicating that the game stop state has been set, and sends a predetermined security signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P via the external information terminal board 500.
When the sub-control board 300 receives a game stop command, a predetermined game stop state setting suggestion image is displayed on the performance display device 21, a predetermined game stop state suggestion sound is output from the audio output device 10, and the front door performance lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the board performance lamp GL are turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern to suggest that the game stop state has been set. Also, the security signal transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P can be received by the hall computer or an external display device for displaying various information, so that the hall computer can grasp that the game stop state has been set, and the external display device can suggest that the game stop state has been set.

(Outline of control of the movable piece 16b and the opening/closing door 18b during a game stop state)
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when play is stopped, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and the opening/closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 is restricted.
Specifically, when game play is stopped, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the start winning port solenoid 16c, which drives the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 to open and close, so as not to operate, and also controls the large winning port solenoid 18c, which drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning port 18 to open and close, so as not to operate.

As a result, for example, if the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 is open during the playable state, the movable piece 16b closes when the game stop state is set, and the closed state of the movable piece 16b is maintained during the game stop state. Also, for example, if the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 is open during the playable state, the opening and closing door 18b closes when the game stop state is set, and the closed state of the opening and closing door 18b is maintained during the game stop state.
Also, for example, if a game stop state is set before the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 opens after a winning normal symbol is drawn during a playable state, the movable piece 16b will not be opened and the movable piece 16b will remain closed during the game stop state. Also, for example, if a special game is being played during a playable state, and after a predetermined round of game is ended and the opening/closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 is closed, if a game stop state is set before the next round of game is started and the opening/closing door 18b opens, the opening/closing door 18b will not be opened and the opening/closing door 18b will remain closed during the game stop state.

(Overview of control related to payout of game balls during game stop state)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the game is stopped, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned control so that the game does not proceed.
On the other hand, during a game stop state, the control of launching game balls by the launch/payout control board 200 is stopped, but the control of the payout of game balls by the launch/payout control board 200 is not stopped.

Specifically, after the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 transmits a prize ball designation command to the launch payout control board 200 to pay out a corresponding number of prize balls based on the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 14, the first start winning port 15, the second start winning port 16, or the large winning port 18 (i.e., after the launch payout control board 200 receives the prize ball designation command), the launch payout control board 200 continues to control the payout of game balls even if a game stop state is set.

As a result, for example, when prize balls are being paid out sequentially as a result of game balls entering the big prize opening 18 during the execution of a special game (i.e., a playable state), even if a game stop state is set, all prize balls based on the above-mentioned balls entering the big prize opening 18 will be paid out. In other words, all prize balls that were acquired by game balls entering the big prize opening 18 before the game stop state was set but have not yet been paid out at the time the game stop state was set will also be paid out.
In this manner, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, if a game ball enters one of the winning ports while in a playable state, and a game stop state is set in the middle of the payout of prize balls based on that ball, the progress of the game by the main control board 100 and the firing of game balls by the launch/payout control board 200 are stopped, but the payout of prize balls by the launch/payout control board 200 continues without being stopped even during the game stop state.

Similarly, even if a game stop state is set after a player presses the ball lending button 36 and the game ball lending device R sends a loan ball payout command to the launch and payout control board 200 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as loan balls, the control of the payout of the game balls by the launch and payout control board 200 is still executed.
As a result, even if a game stop state is set when a predetermined number of game balls (loan balls) are being paid out by pressing the ball loan button 36, all of the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In other words, even if the ball loan button 36 is pressed before the game stop state is set and the payout of game balls has started, but the payout of game balls has not been completed at the time the game stop state is set, all of the game balls are paid out.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, even when play is stopped, the operation of the game ball lending device R, value information display device 35, ball lending switch 36a, and card return switch 37a is not restricted, and the transmission of signals and commands from these devices, and the reception of signals and commands by these devices are not restricted.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, even if the ball loan button 36 is pressed while the game is stopped, all of the specified number of game balls are paid out.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, even when the game is stopped, the value information continues to be displayed on the value information display device 35. Also, when the ball lending button 36 is pressed during the game is stopped, the game ball lending device R transmits a subtraction command to the value information display device 35, so that the value information is updated and displayed on the value information display device 35 even during the game is stopped.
Furthermore, even if the card return button 37 is pressed while the game is stopped, the card return switch 37a sends a return request signal to the game ball lending device R, so that the game ball lending device R controls the ejection of the card even while the game is stopped.

(Outline of Determination of Payout-Related Errors During a Game Stop State)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, among the payout-related errors, the ball out error, the full tank error, the payout count switch error, the ball jam error, the excess prize ball error, the radio wave error, and the payout motor error are judged (detected) by the launch payout control board 200. Also, among the payout-related errors, the door open error is judged (detected) by the main control board 100.

Here, when the game is in a playable state and the state regarding the difference ball operation stop control described below is a pre-activation warning state, an activation warning state, or an activation notice state, both the main control board 100 and the launch and payout control board 200 determine whether a corresponding error has occurred.
In contrast, during a game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines whether a door opening error has occurred, and does not determine whether other errors (the main control-related errors mentioned above) have occurred that can be determined by the main control board 100.
Specifically, even when play is stopped, when the main body frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, a main body frame open detection signal or a front door open detection signal is input to the launch/payout control board 200, which causes the launch/payout control board 200 to transmit a main body frame open command or a front door open command to the main control board 100. When the main control board 100 receives the main body frame open command or the front door open command, the main CPU 101 determines that a door open error has occurred.
On the other hand, even when the game is stopped, for example, if a magnet is directed toward the game board 11, the magnetic detection sensor 70a detects the magnetism and outputs a magnetic detection signal to the main control board 100, but even if the magnetic detection signal is input to the main control board 100, the main CPU 101 does not determine that a main control magnetic error has occurred. Therefore, even if a magnet is directed toward the game board 11 during the game stop state, a main control magnetic error will not occur.
Similarly, for example, when radio waves are applied to the game board 11, the radio wave detection sensor 71a detects the radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the main control board 100, but the main CPU 101 does not determine that a main control radio wave error has occurred even if the radio wave detection signal is input to the main control board 100. Therefore, while the game is stopped, even if radio waves are applied to the game board 11, a main control radio wave error does not occur.
In other words, even if an event occurs that causes a main control-related error while the game is stopped, the main CPU 101 does not determine the occurrence of a main control-related error, and therefore a main control-related error will not occur.

As described above, even if the game is stopped, if it is determined that a door open error has occurred, the main CPU 101 sends an error indication command corresponding to the door open error to the sub-control board 300. As a result, even if the game is stopped, if the main frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, it is determined that a door open error has occurred, and the performance display device 21, various lamps, and audio output device 10 indicate that a door open error has occurred.

In addition, during a game stop state, the payout CPU 201 of the launch payout control board 200 is configured not to generate any errors. Therefore, during a game stop state, the occurrence of a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout count switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, and a payout motor error is not determined.
Specifically, even if the payout motor 62 is operating during a game stop state and the payout counting switch 63 does not count the game balls for a predetermined period of time, the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a ball out error has occurred. Therefore, even if the payout counting switch 63 does not count the game balls for a predetermined period of time during a game stop state, a ball out error does not occur. And, since the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a ball out error has occurred, a ball out error command is not sent from the launch payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 does not recognize that a ball out error has occurred.
Similarly, during a game stop state, for example, when radio waves are irradiated to the outlet 19, the outlet radio wave detection sensor 71b detects radio waves and outputs a radio wave detection signal to the launch/payout control board 200, but even if a radio wave detection signal is input to the launch/payout control board 200, the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a payout radio wave error has occurred. Therefore, during a game stop state, even if radio waves are irradiated to the outlet 19, a payout radio wave error does not occur. And, since the payout CPU 201 does not determine that a payout radio wave error has occurred, a payout radio wave error command is not transmitted from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 does not recognize that a payout radio wave error has occurred.
In other words, even if an event that causes a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout count switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, or a payout motor error occurs during a game stop state, the payout CPU 201 does not determine the occurrence of these errors, so these errors do not occur. Also, the occurrence of these errors is not recognized by the main control board 100.

Even when the game is stopped, the payout CPU 201 of the launch payout control board 200 may continue to determine the occurrence of a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, or a payout motor error.

(Outline of signal transmission to outside of pachinko machine P during game stop state)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the transmission of winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and the payout CPU 201 of the launch payout control board 200 controls the transmission of prize ball signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
Here, when the game is in a playable state and in a pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, or activation notice state, the main CPU 101 controls to transmit a winning signal or a jackpot signal, and the payout CPU 201 controls to transmit a payout ball signal.
On the other hand, while the game is stopped, as described above, the control by the main control board 100 to transmit winning signals and big win signals is restricted.

In addition, while the game is stopped, the control of sending the payout ball signal by the launch and payout control board 200 is not restricted and continues to be performed.
Specifically, for example, even if a game stop state is set while the payout CPU 201 is transmitting a payout ball signal, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the transmission of these signals by the payout CPU 201 ends. Also, for example, when game balls are paid out after the game stop state is set and the number of paid out game balls reaches a predetermined number, the payout CPU 201 transmits a payout ball signal, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the transmission of the payout ball signal by the payout CPU 201 ends.

(Overview of control when the setting change state or setting confirmation state is set)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set, the game ball is not shot even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, and the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the game ball entering the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16 or the game ball passing through the gate 20, and stops the display of the special symbol variation, the display of the normal symbol variation, and the execution of the special game. As a result, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the game does not progress, just like in the game stop state.
In addition, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls so as not to operate the start winning port solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning port 16 to open and close, and also controls so as not to operate the large winning port solenoid 18c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning port 18 to open and close. As a result, the movable piece 16b and the opening and closing door 18b remain closed during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, just like the game stop state.
Furthermore, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, similar to the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only determines whether a door opening error has occurred, and does not determine whether other errors (the main control-related errors mentioned above) that can be determined by the main control board 100 have occurred.

Furthermore, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the payout of game balls continues by the launch and payout control board 200, just as in the game stop state, but the occurrence of a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, or a payout motor error is not detected, and the control of the transmission of the payout prize ball signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is not restricted.
In addition, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the payout of game balls by the launch and payout control board 200 may be stopped, or the occurrence of a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, or a payout motor error may be continuously determined, or the control of the transmission of the payout ball signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P may be restricted.

(Overview of the control related to the ball difference activation stop control (control to stop activation based on the number of ball difference))
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, in order to prevent a situation in which a player acquires an excessive number of game balls during play and the game becomes too gambling-like, the main CPU 101 executes operation stop control (difference ball operation stop control) to stop the operation of the pachinko machine P based on the difference ball number from a predetermined calculation start point during a playable state reaching a predetermined operation stop number (95,000 in this embodiment).

The difference in the number of balls is the difference between the number of prize balls (prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the general prize opening detection sensor 14a, the first start prize opening detection sensor 15a, the second start prize opening detection sensor 16a, and the large prize opening detection sensor 18a) that are paid out based on the entry of game balls into each winning opening (general prize opening 14, first start prize opening 15, second start prize opening 16, and large prize opening 18) and the number of game balls that are shot by the player and enter each winning opening or are received by the out opening 19 (game balls detected by the out sensor 19a, in other words, game balls used in the game).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the difference ball count value used to determine the difference ball number is stored in a specific area in the unused area provided in the main RAM 103.
The ball difference count value stored in this specific area is reset by power recovery (power off/on) in the activation notice state and states other than the activation state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state) described below, and is reset in the activation notice state and activation state by an initialization process (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) associated with the setting of the setting change state. When reset, the ball difference count value is set to an initial value (100,000 in this embodiment).
In the activation warning state, the difference ball count value may not be reset by the return of the power supply, but may be reset by an initialization process associated with the setting of the setting change state, similar to the activation notice state and the activation state. In the pre-activation warning state, the difference ball count value may not be reset if the power supply is turned off/on with the main frame 2 or the front door 3 open, or if the power supply is turned off/on with a specific error occurring (for example, an error in which an error notification continues until power is cut off, etc.).

The difference ball count value is incremented by the number of prize balls to be paid out based on a game ball entering each winning hole (each time a game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection sensor 14a, the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, or the large winning hole detection sensor 18a), and is decremented by 1 each time a game ball is detected by the out sensor 19a.When the difference ball count value is 0, even if a game ball is detected by the out sensor 19a, the difference ball count value is not decremented and remains 0.
Then, when the difference ball count value reaches a second reference value (195,000 in this embodiment) described later, the difference ball count reaches the predetermined operation stop count (95,000).

In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, each time a game ball enters each winning port, the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on that ball is added to the difference ball count value, but this is not limited to this, and each time prize balls are actually paid out based on a game ball entering each winning port, the number of prize balls paid out may be added to the difference ball count value.
As described above, the difference ball count value is decremented by 1 each time a game ball is detected by the out sensor 19a, but this is not limited to the above, and the difference ball count value may be decremented by 1 each time a launched game ball reaches the game area 12. In other words, the difference ball count value may be decremented by 1 each time a game ball is used in a game.
Also, as described above, in the activation prediction state and activation state, the difference ball count value is reset by performing the initialization process (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) associated with setting the setting change state, but this is not limited to this, and the value may also be reset by performing the initialization process (normal initialization process) that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is on when the power is restored and the setting confirmation state or playable state is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, four types of states related to the difference ball operation stop control are provided: a pre-activation warning state, an activation warning state, an activation notice state, and an activation state. During the playable state, the machine stays in one of the four states described above.

(Pre-warning state)
The pre-warning state is set by resetting the difference ball count value, and is a state in which the game remains when the difference ball count value has not reached a first reference value (190,000 in this embodiment), and the game remains in this pre-warning state mainly during the playable state. When the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the pre-warning state ends and the activation warning state is set.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the difference ball count value remains in the pre-warning state from when it is reset until it reaches the first reference value.

(Activation warning state)
The activation warning state is set when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value as described above. Then, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value (195,000), the activation warning state ends. If a special game was being played at the time of reaching the second reference value (195,000), the activation notice state is set, and if a special game was not being played, the activation state is set.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the differential ball count value remains in the activated warning state from the time when it reaches the first reference value until it reaches the second reference value.

In addition, when the activation warning state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a first ball difference operation stop control designation command indicating that to the sub-control board 300. Then, when the sub-control board 300 receives the first ball difference operation stop control designation command, until a termination condition is met, that is, until a power outage occurs, until the activation warning state ends, or until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, an activation warning suggestion is performed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, suggesting that the first reference value has been reached and that the second reference value will soon be reached (for example, an activation warning text image is displayed saying "There are about 5000 shots left until the limit is reached") (see FIG. 51 (e) to (g)), and the front door performance lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the board performance lamp GL are turned on or off according to a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, only the front door performance lamp DL is turned on in blue, etc.). In addition, when the first difference ball operation stop control designation command is received, an activation warning sound (for example, a sound saying "There are about 5000 shots left until the limit is reached") is output from the time (i.e., the time when the activation warning state is set) until a predetermined activation warning sound output time (5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. This indicates that the activation warning state has been set.
The activation warning sound may be continuously output until a power outage occurs, or may be continuously output until the activation warning state ends.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after the activation warning state is set, unless the power is restored by interruption, even if the difference ball count value falls below the first reference value, the activation warning state will not end and the pre-activation warning state will not be set. Note that, if the difference ball count value falls below the first reference value after the activation warning state is set, the activation warning state may be ended and the pre-activation warning state may be set.

(Activation notice state)
As described above, the activation notice state is set when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and a special game is being played at the time of this reaching. When the special game being played ends, the activation notice state ends and the activation state is set. Also, when the initialization process (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) associated with the setting of the setting change state described above is performed during the activation notice state, the activation notice state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set.
In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, if a special game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the machine will remain in the activation notice state from when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value until the special game being executed ends or the initialization process associated with setting the setting change state is performed.

The activation notice state may be ended not by the initialization process associated with the setting of the setting change state, but by the initialization process (normal initialization process) that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is on when the power is restored and the setting confirmation state or the playable state is set.

In addition, when the activation notice state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a second ball difference operation stop control designation command indicating that to the sub-control board 300. Then, when the sub-control board 300 receives the second ball difference operation stop control designation command, an activation notice suggestion (for example, an activation notice text image of "The game will stop after the big win ends") is performed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, suggesting that the operation of the pachinko machine P will stop after the special game ends (see FIG. 51(h)), and the front door performance lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the board performance lamp GL are turned on or off according to a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, only the front door performance lamp DL is turned on in blue, etc.). In addition, when the second ball activation stop control designation command is received, an activation notice sound (for example, a sound saying "The game will end after the big win") is output from the time (i.e., the time when the activation notice state is set) until a predetermined activation notice sound output time (7 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. This indicates that the activation notice state has been set.
The activation notice indication and the lighting or extinguishing of various lamps in a predetermined lighting pattern may be performed within a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds). The activation notice sound may be continuously output until a power outage occurs, or may be continuously output until the activation notice state ends.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described later, when the activation state is set based on the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value, the game does not proceed (the game stops); however, as described above, when a special game is being played when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the activation notice state is set instead of the activation state, and when the special game being played ends, the activation notice state ends and the activation state is set. In other words, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value during the execution of a special game, the game is not immediately stopped based on the reaching of the second reference value and the special game being played is not forcibly ended, but the game proceeds until the final round of the special game being played ends. This allows the player to maintain his interest even if the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value during the execution of a special game.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, even if the activation notice state is set but the difference ball count value decreases during the activation notice state and falls below the second reference value when the special game being executed ends, the activation notice state ends and the activation state is set. Note that, if the difference ball count value falls below the second reference value when the special game ends, the activation state may not be set.

(Activated state)
As described above, the activation state is set when the special game is not being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, or when the special game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and the currently executed special game ends. Then, when the initialization process (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) accompanying the setting of the setting change state described above is performed, the activation state ends and the pre-activation warning state is set.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if a special game is not being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the machine will stay in the activation state from the time the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value until the initialization process associated with the setting of the setting change state is performed. Also, if a special game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, the machine will stay in the activation state from the time the currently executed special game ends until the initialization process associated with the setting of the setting change state is performed.
In other words, after the activation state is set, the activation state will not end and will continue unless an initialization process is performed in conjunction with the setting of the setting change state.

The activation state may be terminated not by the initialization process associated with the setting of the setting change state, but by the initialization process (normal initialization process) that is executed when the RAM clear switch 109 is on when the power is restored and the setting confirmation state or the playable state is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits an activation state setting command indicating that the activation state has been set to the launch/payout control board 200. This allows the launch/payout control board 200 to know that the activation state has been set.
In the activation state, the game ball is not launched even if the operating handle 5 is rotated, as in the above-mentioned game stop state. Also, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 is not configured to detect the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16 or the passage of the game ball through the gate 20, so that even if the game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, a lottery for a big win based on the ball is not performed, and even if the game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery for a normal pattern based on the passage is not performed, and new prize balls, new reserved memory of a special random number, and new reserved memory of a normal random number are not generated. Furthermore, if the variable display of the special pattern or the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 is configured to stop the variable display of the special pattern or the variable display of the normal pattern.
In this manner, in the activated state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 performs the above-mentioned control, so that the game does not progress (the game stops), just as in the game stop state.
As described above, when the operating handle 5 is rotated in the activated state, a game ball is not launched, but a handle operation command is transmitted from the launch/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100. Then, when the main CPU 101 receives the handle operation command, it transmits a rotation operation command to the sub-control board 300. Therefore, even during the activated state, the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 300 can grasp that the operating handle 5 has been rotated.

In addition, in the activated state, since the game does not progress as described above, the control of transmitting a winning signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 is also restricted, similar to the game stopped state.
For example, if the activation state is set while a winning signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 stops the variable display of the special symbol, so the main CPU 101 cannot stop the ongoing transmission of the winning signal, and the winning signal remains in the transmitted state. Also, if the activation state is set when the winning signal is not being transmitted, even if a game ball subsequently enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 does not detect the ball, so the main CPU 101 cannot start transmitting the winning signal.

Furthermore, in the activated state, similar to the game stop state, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 is restricted.
Specifically, in the activated state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 controls the start prize opening solenoid 16c, which drives the movable piece 16b of the second start prize opening 16 to open and close, so as not to operate, and also controls the large prize opening solenoid 18c, which drives the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize opening 18 to open and close, so as not to operate.
As a result, for example, if the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 is open, the movable piece 16b closes when the activation state is set, and the movable piece 16b remains closed during the activation state. Also, during the activation state, the opening and closing door 18b remains closed. Also, for example, after a winning normal symbol is drawn, if the activation state is set before the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 opens, the movable piece 16b will not be opened, and the movable piece 16b will remain closed during the activation state.

In addition, in the activated state, as in the game stop state, the control of the launching and paying out control board 200 to launch the game balls is stopped, but the control of the paying out of the game balls by the launch and paying out control board 200 is not stopped.

Specifically, after the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 transmits a prize ball designation command to the launch payout control board 200 to pay out a corresponding number of prize balls based on the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 14, the first start winning port 15, the second start winning port 16, or the large winning port 18 (i.e., after the launch payout control board 200 receives the prize ball designation command), the launch payout control board 200 continues to control the payout of game balls even if the activation state is set.

As a result, for example, even if the activation state is set when prize balls based on game balls entering any of the winning slots have been paid out, all prize balls based on the above-mentioned ball entries will be paid out. In other words, all prize balls that were acquired by game balls entering any of the winning slots before the activation state was set but have not yet been paid out at the time the activation state was set will also be paid out.
In this way, if a game ball enters one of the winning ports before the activation state is set, and the activation state is set while prize balls based on that ball are being paid out, the progress of the game by the main control board 100 and the firing of game balls by the launching and payout control board 200 will stop, but the payout of prize balls by the launching and payout control board 200 will continue even during the activation state without being stopped.

Similarly, even if the activation state is set after the player presses the ball lending button 36 and the game ball lending device R sends a loan ball payout command to the launch and payout control board 200 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as loan balls, the launch and payout control board 200 still controls the payout of the game balls.
As a result, even if the activation state is set when a predetermined number of game balls (loaned balls) are being paid out by pressing the ball loan button 36, all of the predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In other words, even if the ball loan button 36 is pressed before the activation state is set and the payout of game balls is started, all game balls that have not yet been paid out at the time the activation state is set are paid out.

Furthermore, even when in an activated state, the operation of the game ball lending device R, value information display device 35, ball lending switch 36a, and card return switch 37a is not restricted, and the transmission of signals and commands from these devices, or the reception of signals and commands by these devices, is not restricted.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, even if the ball loan button 36 is pressed during the activation state, all of the specified number of game balls are paid out.

Moreover, even during the activation state, the display of value information continues on the value information display device 35. Also, when the ball lending button 36 is pressed during the activation state, the game ball lending device R transmits a subtraction command to the value information display device 35, so that the update display of the value information is performed on the value information display device 35 even during the activation state. Furthermore, when the card return button 37 is pressed during the activation state, the card return switch 37a transmits a return request signal to the game ball lending device R, so that the game ball lending device R controls the ejection of the card even during the activation state.
When the ball lending button 36 is pressed during the activation state, the game balls may not be paid out and the update display of the value information may not be performed on the value information display device 35. When the card return button 37 is pressed during the activation state, the game ball lending device R may not control the ejection of the card.

Also, in the activated state, as in the game stop state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 only judges whether a door opening error has occurred, and does not judge whether other errors (main control related errors mentioned above) that are judged by the main control board 100 have occurred. Even during the activated state, if it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, the main CPU 101 transmits an error indication command corresponding to the door opening error to the sub-control board 300. As described above, even during the activated state, if the main frame 2 or the front door 3 is opened, it is determined that a door opening error has occurred, and the performance display device 21, various lamps, and audio output device 10 indicate that a door opening error has occurred.
Furthermore, in the activation state, as in the game stop state, the payout CPU 201 of the launch payout control board 200 is configured not to generate any errors. Therefore, during the game stop state, the occurrence of a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, and a payout motor error is not determined.
Note that even during the activation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 may also determine the occurrence of an error (main control related error) other than the door open error determined by the main control board 100. As a result, even during the activation state, if the occurrence condition for an error other than the door open error is satisfied, the error will occur.
In addition, during the activation state, the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 may be configured not to determine whether a door opening error has occurred.
In addition, even when in the activated state, the payout CPU 201 of the launch payout control board 200 may continue to determine the occurrence of a ball out error, a full tank error, a payout counting switch error, a ball jam error, an excess prize ball error, a payout radio wave error, or a payout motor error.

In addition, in the activated state, as in the game stop state, the control by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 to send winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted, but the control by the launch and payout control board 200 to send payout ball signals is not restricted and continues.
In addition, in the activated state, the control of the launch and payout control board 200 to transmit the payout ball signal may also be restricted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the activation state, the game does not progress and the control for launching the game balls is stopped, so that the game balls cannot be launched, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in the activation state, the game may not progress, but the control for launching the game balls by the launch/payout control board 200 may not be stopped. In other words, in the activation state, the game may not progress, but the game balls may be launched.

In addition, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 clears the display on the first special symbol display device 30, the second special symbol display device 31, the normal symbol display device 32, the first special symbol reserved display device 38, the second special symbol reserved display device 39, and the normal symbol reserved display device 33. Specifically, these display devices are composed of LEDs that can be turned on or off, and the LEDs constituting each display device are turned off. As a result, the special symbols that were being displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped manner on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 32, the normal symbols that were being displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped manner on the normal symbol display device 32, the number of first special symbols reserved displayed by the first special symbol reserved display device 38, the number of second special symbols reserved displayed by the second special symbol reserved display device 39, and the number of normal symbols reserved displayed by the normal symbol reserved display device 33 are all cleared.
In contrast to this, if the right-hit notification lamp RL connected to the sub-control board 300 is lit when the activation state is set, this right-hit notification lamp RL will continue to be lit even after the activation state is set.
In addition to the right hit notification lamp RL, for example, if a reserved number lamp that indicates the reserved number of the first special chart or the reserved number of the second special chart by lighting in a predetermined manner is connected to the sub-control board 300, the reserved number lamp may also be made to continue lighting in a predetermined manner indicating the reserved number of the first special chart or the reserved number of the second special chart even after the activation state is set. In other words, for a display device connected to the sub-control board 300 that gives a suggestion regarding the progress of the game, the suggestion may be made to continue even after the activation state is set.

In addition, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits a third difference ball activation stop control designation command indicating that to the sub-control board 300. Then, when the sub-control board 300 receives the third difference ball operation stop control designation command, various effect images such as the effect pattern 50 displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 at this time, the reserved image indicating that reserved memory is being stored, and the background image are cleared, and then, until a power outage occurs, an activation indication indicating that the operation of the pachinko machine P has stopped (for example, an activation text image saying "Difference ball operation stop function is in operation. Play will stop because the difference ball upper limit has been reached. Please call an attendant" is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 (see FIG. 51(i)), and a predetermined activation sound (for example, a sound saying "Play will stop because the difference ball upper limit has been reached") is output from the audio output device 10, and the front door effect lamp DL, the status notification lamp EL, and the board effect lamp GL are lit or turned off in a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, the front door effect lamp DL is lit in blue, the status notification lamp EL is lit in red, and the board effect lamp GL is turned off), indicating that the activation state has been set.
In addition, the activation suggestion, the output of the activation sound, and the indication that the activation state has been set by turning on or off various lamps may not be performed until a power outage occurs, but may be performed only until a predetermined time has passed (a time longer than the time for which the indication that the activation warning state has been set is given (for example, 10 minutes)).
In addition, the various effect images displayed at the time the activation state is set may be continued to be displayed instead of being cleared. The above-mentioned activation suggestion (display of an activation text image) may be superimposed on these various effect images.

Furthermore, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 displays a code indicating the activation state on the main information display device 105. This allows the user to know from the main information display device 105 that the activation state has been set.
When the activated state is set, no display may be provided on the main information display device 105. In other words, the display on the main information display device 105 may be cleared.

In addition, when the activation state is set, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal (activation state detection signal) indicating that the activation state has been set to the hall computer. This allows the hall computer to know that the activation state has been set.

In addition, in the activated state, the game does not progress and the game ball is not launched, so the game ball does not enter the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, and the special symbol variation display, special game, and normal game are not executed. Therefore, various commands accompanying these executions (game progress) (for example, a start winning command based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a variation mode command or a variation pattern command based on the start of variation of the special symbol, an opening command based on the start of the special game, etc.) are not transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, the cross key detection sensor 25a that detects the pressing of the cross key 25 and the pressing operation detection sensor 9d that detects the pressing of the operation button 9b are connected to the sub-control board 300, and these sensors are designed to perform detection even in the activated state. This makes it possible for the sub-control board 300 to grasp the pressing of the operation button 9b and the pressing of the cross key 25 even in the activated state.

(Outline of various state settings related to the difference ball operation stop control)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, differential ball operation stop control phase data for setting various states related to the differential ball operation stop control (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, activation state) is stored in a specific area in the unused area provided in the main RAM 103. By storing state values corresponding to the various states described above in this differential ball operation stop control phase data, one of the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, and activation state is set.

Specifically, when power is restored in the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, or when initialization processing is performed in the activation notice state or the activation state in association with the setting of the setting change state, the main CPU 101 clears the difference ball operation stop control phase data and then stores a state value corresponding to the pre-activation warning state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. This sets the pre-activation warning state.
That is, when the power is restored in the pre-activation warning state or the activation warning state, the difference ball count value is reset as described above, and the pre-activation warning state is set. Also, when the initialization process associated with the setting of the setting change state is performed in the activation notice state or the activation state, these states end and the difference ball count value is reset, and the pre-activation warning state is set.

In addition, when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation warning state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. That is, the difference ball operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation warning state. This sets the activation warning state.
In addition, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and a special game is being executed at the time of reaching the second reference value, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation notice state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. That is, the difference ball operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation notice state. This sets the activation notice state.
In addition, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and the special game was not being executed when the difference ball count value reached the second reference value, or when the special game that was being executed when the difference ball count value reached the second reference value is ended, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. That is, the difference ball operation stop control phase data is updated to a state value corresponding to the activation state. This sets the activation state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, in the game stop state, setting change state or setting confirmation state, which are control states in which game play does not progress, the operation of the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 and the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning port 18 is restricted, and the movable piece 16b and the large winning port 18 remain closed during the control state in which game play does not progress.
This prevents the start winning port solenoid 16c and the large winning port solenoid 18c from continuing to operate even when a game is not in progress, which can prevent these components from overheating, causing breakdowns or damage. Also, by keeping the second start winning port 16 and the large winning port 18 open, it can prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting illegal parts into these winning ports to win prize balls while a game is not in progress.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, in the game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not progress, game balls are not fired, but the firing and payout control board 200 continues to pay out game balls (both the payout of prize balls and the payout of loan balls), and the value information is displayed on the value information display device 35, and cards are dispensed by the game ball lending device R, etc.
This can prevent, for example, the occurrence of a disadvantage in which, even though a game ball entered any winning port before the game stop state was set, the payout of prize balls is stopped because the game stop state was set, and a player is unable to acquire some of the prize balls based on the ball entry, or the occurrence of a disadvantage in which, even though the ball lending switch 36 was pressed by the player before the game stop state was set, the payout of loaned balls is stopped because the game stop state was set, and a player is unable to acquire some of the loaned balls. In addition, even if the game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 does not need to execute special processing such as sending a signal or command to the launch payout control board 200 to stop operation or stop the payout of game balls, and therefore it is possible to prevent an increase in the load on the hardware resources of the main CPU 101, etc.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, during a game stop state, which is a control state in which the game does not progress, the occurrence of only door open errors, among the errors whose occurrence is determined by the main control board 100, is determined.
This makes it possible to prevent situations in which the main frame 2 or front door 3 is opened while play is stopped, and fraudulent acts are committed against the main control board 100.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, during a game stop state, which is a control state in which the game is not progressing, the control of the transmission of winning signals and jackpot signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P by the main control board 100 is restricted, but the control of the transmission of payout ball signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P by the launch and payout control board 200 is not restricted.
This allows information regarding the payout of game balls to be reliably grasped by devices outside the pachinko machine P even during a game stop state in which the payout control board 200 continues to control the payout of game balls. Even when a game stop state is set, the main CPU 101 does not need to execute special processing such as sending a command to the payout control board 200 to stop the transmission of signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and since the control of the transmission of winning signals and big win signals by the main control board 100 is limited, it is possible to prevent an increase in the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the time during which the main control board 100 transmits a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is set to be longer than the time during which the launch and payout control board 200 transmits a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
As a result, signals transmitted from the main control board 100 to the outside of the pachinko machine P are transmitted more reliably to the outside of the pachinko machine P than signals transmitted from the firing and payout control board 200 to the outside of the pachinko machine P.

The setting of the transmission time is not limited to this.
For example, the time taken for the launch/payout control board 200 to transmit a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P may be set to be longer than the time taken for the main control board 100 to transmit a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
When set up in this manner, the signal transmitted from the launch and payout control board 200 to the outside of the pachinko machine P is more reliably transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P than the signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to the outside of the pachinko machine P.
In addition, the time at which the launch and payout control board 200 transmits a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P may be set to be the same as the time at which the main control board 100 transmits a signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, an activation state is set in which the game does not progress and no game balls are fired, based on the difference ball count value reaching a second reference value (the difference ball count reaching a predetermined activation stop number).
This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player acquires an excessive number of game balls during play, leading to an excessively high level of gambling tendency, and also produces the same effect as during the game stop state described above.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, during the activation state, as in the game stop state, the occurrence of only the door open error is determined by the main control board 100.
This makes it possible to prevent situations in which the main frame 2 or front door 3 is opened during activation and fraudulent acts are committed against the main control board 100.

(Outline of Processing in Pachinko Machine P)
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the main control board 100 as the special game, normal game, and special game progress as described above will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the power cut-off and evacuation process of the main control board 100 will be described.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the voltage of the supplied power source falls below a predetermined value, the main processing of the main control board 100 described later is interrupted and the power cut-off evacuation processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 21 is executed.

In step 100, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a power interruption occurrence signal has been detected. If it is judged that a power interruption occurrence signal has not been detected, the power interruption evacuation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a power interruption occurrence signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 executes a process of calculating checksums of the used area and unused area in the main RAM 103, and stores the calculated checksums in a second area.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 executes a backup process to hold various data (setting values, game machine status flags indicating control status, checksums, backup flags, error information, various data relating to game progress, and game performance data) stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103, and stores a backup flag indicating the result of this backup process in the second area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 103.
In step 103, the main CPU 101 prohibits access to the main RAM 103. As a result, it becomes impossible to store various data in the main RAM 103 or to read (load) various data from the main RAM 103. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 104.

In step 104, the main CPU 101 stops transmitting various signals (such as a main command permission signal indicating that two-way communication with the main control board 100 has been established and commands can be sent to the main control board 100, and a launch permission signal permitting the launch of game balls) to the launch/dispatch control board 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 105.
In step 105, the main CPU 101 sets the power interruption monitoring time (3000 ms) in the power interruption monitoring time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 106.

In step 106, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a power interruption occurrence signal has been detected. If it is judged that a power interruption occurrence signal has been detected, the process returns to step 105. On the other hand, if it is judged that a power interruption occurrence signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to the next step 107.
In step 107, the main CPU 101 judges whether the power interruption monitoring time set in step 105 has elapsed. If it is judged that the power interruption monitoring time has not elapsed, the process returns to step 106. On the other hand, if it is judged that the power interruption monitoring time has elapsed, the process ends and executes the power interruption recovery process described below. Note that a subtraction timer is used for the power interruption monitoring time timer counter, and the timer counter is subtracted by one each time the above-mentioned power interruption occurrence signal detection judgment is executed, and when it reaches 0, it is judged that the power interruption monitoring time has elapsed. When a power interruption occurs, the operation of the pachinko machine P is stopped while the above-mentioned steps 105 to 107 are looped.

Next, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be described.
When power is supplied from the power supply board 600 (when power is restored after a power outage), a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

In step 110, the main CPU 101 executes a power interruption recovery process. Then, the process proceeds to step 111.
In step 111, the main CPU 101 inhibits interrupts from other processes.

In step 112, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number, which is referenced when updating the winning pattern random number. This initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number is used to determine the initial value of the winning pattern random number. In other words, the winning pattern random number is updated with the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number at the time when the update is started as the initial value. Then, once this random number range has been completed, the update of the winning pattern random number is continued with the initial value update random number for the winning pattern random number at that time as the initial value. Then, proceed to the next step 113.
In step 113, the main CPU 101 analyzes various commands used to execute the special game and the normal game. Then, the process proceeds to step 114.

In step 114, the main CPU 101 transmits the command stored (set) in the performance transmission data storage area to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 115.
In step 115, the main CPU 101 allows interruption of other processes, and then proceeds to step 116.

In step 116, the main CPU 101 updates the reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and variable pattern random number, which are random numbers for determining the variable presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the variable presentation random numbers). Then, when the processing of step 116 is completed, the processing of steps 111 to 116 is repeatedly executed thereafter until the timer interrupt processing described below is performed.

Next, the power interruption recovery process of step 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 130, the main CPU 101 executes initial setting processing required for executing various processes when the power is restored after a power outage, such as reading a startup program from the main ROM 102 (when the power switch 650 is turned on, or when the power is restored from an unexpected power outage). The main CPU 101 also starts transmitting various signals (launch permission signal, main command permission signal, etc.) to the launch/payout control board 200. This allows the launch/payout control board 200 to execute control for launching game balls based on the rotation operation of the operation handle 5, and allows the launch/payout control board 200 to transmit commands to the main control board 100. Although not shown in particular, the main CPU 101 also permits access to the main RAM 103. This allows various data to be stored in the main RAM 103 and various data to be read (loaded) from the main RAM 103 thereafter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 131.
In step 131, the main CPU 101 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 103 at this time point, and determines whether or not a backup abnormality has occurred based on the calculated checksum, the checksum stored in the second area of the main RAM 103 (the checksum calculated in step 101 just before the power interruption occurred), and the backup flag stored in the second area. If it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to step 136. On the other hand, if it is determined that no backup abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to the next step 132.

In step 132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 109 is on. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the process proceeds to step 136. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 109 is not on (i.e., is off), the process proceeds to the next step 133.
In step 133, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current control state is a playable state, the setting switch 108 is on, and the main frame open detection sensor 2a is on, i.e., whether the conditions for the playable state to end and the setting confirmation state to be set are met. If it is judged that the conditions are not met (i.e., the current control state is a setting confirmation state, a setting change state, or a game stop state, the setting switch 108 is off, and the main frame open detection sensor 2a is off), the process proceeds to step 135. On the other hand, if it is judged that the conditions are met, the process proceeds to the next step 134.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, as described above, a gaming machine status flag indicating the control status during the stay is stored in the first area in the use area of the main RAM 103, and the control status during the stay can be determined by referring to this gaming machine status flag.

In step 134, the main CPU 101 sets the setting confirmation state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating that in the first area.
In step 135, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormality initialization process if the game stop state is set, and executes a clear process if the setting change state is set or if the setting confirmation state is set in the above-mentioned step 134. Then, the process proceeds to step 144.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the above step 131 that a backup abnormality has occurred, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a RAM abnormality has occurred in step 136, which is reached when it is determined in the above step 132 that the RAM clear switch 109 is on. If it is determined that a RAM abnormality has not occurred, the process proceeds to step 138. On the other hand, if it is determined that a RAM abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to the next step 137.
In step 137, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, and stores in the first area a game machine state flag indicating that a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality has been set. The main CPU 101 also executes a stop-related process based on the setting of the game stop state. Specifically, as the stop-related process, a process of stopping the transmission of a launch permission signal to the launch payout control board 200, a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols, the variable display of normal symbols, and a special game if they were being executed before the setting of the game stop state, a process of stopping the determination of a main control-related error, a process of stopping (limiting) the control of transmitting a winning signal and a big win signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P, a process of displaying an error code on the main information display device 105, a process of transmitting a security signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and the like are executed. As a result, even if the operation handle 5 is rotated, the control of launching game balls by the launch payout control board 200 cannot be executed, and the progress of the game is stopped. Furthermore, among the errors judged to have occurred by the main control board 100, judgment of errors other than door open errors is no longer performed, and control of sending winning signals and big win signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted. On the other hand, the control of paying out game balls and control of sending payout ball signals to the outside of the pachinko machine P by the launch payout control board 200 continue, but judgment of ball out errors, full tank errors, payout counting switch errors, ball jam errors, excess prize ball errors, and payout radio wave errors is no longer performed. Then, proceed to step 143.

Furthermore, in step 138, which is reached if it is determined in step 136 that no RAM abnormality has occurred, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change conditions (i.e., setting switch 108 is on, RAM clear switch 109 is on, and main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on) are met. If it is determined that the setting change conditions are not met, the process proceeds to step 140. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change conditions are met, the process proceeds to the next step 139.
In step 139, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating that in the first area.

In step 140, which is reached if it is determined in step 138 that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a backup abnormality has occurred. If it is determined that a backup abnormality has occurred, the process proceeds to step 142. On the other hand, if it is determined that a backup abnormality has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step 141.
In step 141, the main CPU 101 sets the gameable state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating that in the first area.

In step 142, which is reached when it is determined in step 140 that a backup abnormality has occurred, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a backup abnormality and stores a game machine state flag indicating this in the first area. The main CPU 101 also executes a stop-related process based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related process is similar to the process executed when a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality has been set (the process executed in step 137 above), and therefore will not be described here. Then, the process proceeds to step 143.
In step 143, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormality initialization process if the game stop state is set, and executes a normal initialization process if the game playable state or the setting change state is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 144.

In step 144, the main CPU 101 stores a command to be sent to the sub-control board 300 when power is restored (for example, a state setting command (game stop command) indicating that a game stop state has been set) in the performance transmission data storage area. The command stored here is sent to the sub-control board 300 in step 114 described above. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 145.
In step 145, the main CPU 101 transmits a predetermined command corresponding to the processing executed when the power was restored to the shot/payout control board 200. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 146.

In step 146, the main CPU 101 executes the ball difference control reset process, which is performed based on the power interruption recovery. Then, the power interruption recovery process ends.

Next, the ball difference control reset process of step 146 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 150, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a state value corresponding to the activation notice state or the activation state is stored in the difference ball operation stop phase data. If it is judged that a state value corresponding to the activation notice state or the activation state is not stored (i.e., a state value corresponding to the activation pre-warning state or the activation warning state is stored), the process proceeds to step 152. On the other hand, if it is judged that a state value corresponding to the activation notice state or the activation state is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 151.
In step 151, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the initialization process (abnormal initialization process, normal initialization process) associated with the setting of the setting change state has been executed in the power interruption recovery process described above. If it is determined that the initialization process associated with the setting change state has not been executed, the difference ball control reset process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization process associated with the setting change state has been executed, the process proceeds to the next step 152.

In step 152, the main CPU 101 clears the difference ball operation stop control phase data, and stores a state value corresponding to the pre-warning state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. Then, the process proceeds to step 153.
In step 153, the main CPU 101 resets the ball difference count value, and then ends the ball difference control reset process.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described.
A reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 100 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 25.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current control state is a playable state and whether the state related to the difference ball operation stop control is other than the activation state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state). If it is judged that the state is not a playable state (i.e., a game stop state, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state), or that the state is a playable state but not other than the activation state (i.e., an activation state), the process proceeds to step 217. On the other hand, if it is judged that the state is a playable state and other than the activation state, the process proceeds to the next step 201.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 executes a timer update process to update various timer counters. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202. The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a countdown timer, and the timer counter is counted down by 1 each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 is executed, and the countdown stops when the timer counter reaches 0.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 updates the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to "0", and if the random number counter has completed one cycle, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number at that time. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 judges whether there is an input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, the big winning hole detection sensor 18a, the general winning hole detection sensor 14a, and the out sensor 19a, and executes a sensor detection process to perform a predetermined process based on the input. Note that this sensor detection process is not executed during the game stop state, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, and the activation state. As a result, during these states, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 14, the first start winning hole 15, the second start winning hole 16, or the big winning hole 18, or even if the game ball passes through the gate 20, no new prize balls, new reserved memory of special random numbers, or new reserved memory of general random numbers are generated. Then, proceed to the next step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol-related control process for controlling the special symbol game and the special game. This special symbol-related control process is not executed during the game stop state, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, and the activation state. As a result, during these states, the lottery for the big win, the variable display of the special symbol, and the special game are not executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes a control process related to the normal symbol game to control the normal symbol game. This control process is not executed during the game stop state, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, and the activation state. As a result, the lottery for the normal symbol is not executed during these states. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 206.

In step 206, the main CPU 101 executes a launch position control process to determine a game area (the first game area 12a, the second game area 12b) into which the game ball is shot according to the game state (normal game state, high probability time-saving game state). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 executes a state control process for carrying out various processes related to the error.
Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is in a playable state and is not in an activation state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state), it determines whether a door opening error or a main control related error has occurred, and also determines whether a determination has been made that a payout related error other than a door opening error has occurred in the launch payout control board 200. If it determines that a door opening error or a main control related error has occurred, or if it determines that a payout related error other than a door opening error has occurred in the launch payout control board 200 (i.e., if it has grasped the occurrence of a payout related error other than a door opening error), the main CPU 101 transmits an error indication command indicating the error that has occurred to the sub-control board 300 or the external information terminal board 500. As a result, an error indication image corresponding to the error that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 21, various lamps (board performance lamp GL, front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) are lit in a manner corresponding to the error that has occurred, and an error indication sound corresponding to the error that has occurred is output from the audio output device 10, thereby indicating the error that has occurred and notifying the hall computer, etc. that the above-mentioned error has occurred.
Also, when the game is stopped, the setting is changed, or the setting is confirmed, or when the game is playable and activated, the main CPU 101 judges only whether or not a door opening error has occurred. If it is judged that a door opening error has occurred, the main CPU 101 transmits an error indication command indicating a door opening error to the sub-control board 300 or the external information terminal board 500, as described above. As a result, an error indication image corresponding to the door opening error is displayed on the performance display device 21, various lamps (board performance lamp GL, front door performance lamp DL, status notification lamp EL) are turned on in a manner corresponding to the door opening error, and an error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error is output from the sound output device 10, thereby suggesting the occurrence of a door opening error and informing the hall computer or the like that a door opening error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 determines that the error that occurred has been resolved, or when it determines that the error that occurred has been resolved, it transmits an error resolution command to the sub-control board 300 and the external information terminal board 500. This makes it possible to terminate the error indication that was being executed, and the hall computer, etc. is notified that the error that occurred has been resolved.
Then, proceed to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 executes a payout control process for carrying out various processes required for paying out game balls on the launch payout control board 200.
Specifically, when detection signals from the general winning hole detection sensor 14a, the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, and the large winning hole detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counters provided corresponding to the respective detection signals, and transmits prize ball designation commands corresponding to the respective detection signals to the launch payout control board 200 and the sub-control board 300. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 increments the difference ball count value by the number of prize balls corresponding to the above-mentioned detection signals (the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of game balls into each winning hole).
As described above, even if the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, or activation state is set after a prize ball designation command is sent to the launching and payout control board 200, the control of the payout of prize balls by the launching and payout control board 200 based on the prize ball designation command continues.
In addition, as described above, during the game stop state, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, and the activation state, the game does not progress, so the general winning hole detection sensor 14a, the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, and the large winning hole detection sensor 18a do not detect game balls. Therefore, during the game stop state, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, and the activation state, a new payout control process is not started.
Then, proceed to the next step 209.

In step 209, the main CPU 101 executes an external information control process for controlling the transmission of various signals to the external information terminal board 500. When the machine is in a playable state and in a state other than the activation state, the execution of this external information control process controls the transmission of the above-mentioned winning signal and big win signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P, but during a game stop state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, and an activation state, the game does not progress, so the control of transmitting the winning signal and big win signal to the outside of the pachinko machine P is restricted. When the activation state is set, a control is performed to transmit an activation state detection signal indicating that the activation state has been set to the hall computer.
For example, if the game is stopped, the setting is changed, the setting is confirmed, or the activation state is entered while a winning signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 stops the variable display of the special symbol, so the transmission of the winning signal cannot be stopped and the winning signal continues to be transmitted. Also, even if a game ball enters the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16 after the game is stopped, the setting is changed, the setting is confirmed, or the activation state is entered, the main CPU 101 does not detect the ball, so the transmission of a new winning signal is not started.
Also, if the game is stopped, the setting is changed, or the setting is confirmed while the jackpot signal is being transmitted, the main CPU 101 stops the execution of the special game, so the transmission of the jackpot signal cannot be stopped and the jackpot signal continues to be transmitted. Also, after the game is stopped, the setting is changed, the setting is confirmed, or the activation state is reached, the main CPU 101 does not start a special game, so the transmission of the jackpot signal is not newly initiated.
Then, proceed to the next step 210.

In step 210, the main CPU 101 executes a solenoid control process to set in a predetermined solenoid memory area start winning opening solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16, and large winning opening solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 211.
In step 211, the main CPU 101 executes a display data creation process to create display data for various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol reserved display device 38, second special symbol reserved display device 39, and normal symbol reserved display device 33). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 212.

In step 212, the main CPU 101 executes a port output process to output the start winning port solenoid data and the special winning port solenoid data set in the above-mentioned step 210, as well as the display data created in the above-mentioned step 211, to the corresponding ports. As a result, based on this data, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning port 16 is opened and closed, the opening and closing door 18b of the special winning port 18 is opened and closed, and various displays are displayed. The main CPU 101 also executes a process to transmit commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 213.
In step 213, the main CPU 101 executes a performance display control process for displaying game performance display information on the main information display device 105. Then, the process proceeds to step 214.

In step 214, the main CPU 101 executes a ball difference related command set process.
In step 215, the main CPU 101 executes a ball difference determination control process.

In step 216 , the main CPU 101 executes a handle operation command control process based on the handle operation command transmitted from the launch payout control means 200 .
Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a handle operation command has been received from the launch/payout control board 200, and if it determines that a handle operation command has been received, it stores a rotation operation command indicating that the operating handle 5 is being rotated in a performance transmission data storage area. This makes it possible to transmit to the sub-control board 300 that the operating handle 5 is being rotated. On the other hand, if it determines that a handle operation command has not been received, the main CPU 101 does not perform any particular processing.
As described above, when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a game stop state, or when the control state of the pachinko machine P is in a game playable state regardless of the state related to the difference ball operation stop control, if the operating handle 5 is being rotated, a handle operation command is transmitted from the shot/payout control board 200 to the main control board 100. Therefore, even if the game is stopped or activated, if the operating handle 5 is being rotated, a rotation operation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can grasp that the operating handle 5 is being rotated.
Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is terminated.

In step 217, which is reached when it is determined in step 200 that the game is not in a playable state, or that the game is in a playable state but not in a state other than an activated state, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. If it is determined that the current control state is neither a setting change state nor a setting confirmation state (i.e., a game stop state, or a game is in a playable state and an activated state), the process proceeds to step 207. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current control state is a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the process proceeds to the next step 218.
In step 218, the main CPU 101 executes setting-related processing. Then, the process proceeds to step 207.

Next, the sensor detection process in step 203 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes a gate detection process for performing a lottery for a normal symbol based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 20. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a first start winning hole detection process for conducting a lottery for a big win based on the game ball entering the first start winning hole 15. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a second start winning hole detection process for conducting a lottery for a big win based on the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a special winning hole detection process for carrying out a predetermined process based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the special winning hole 18. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 304.

In step 304, the main CPU 101 executes a general winning hole detection process for carrying out a predetermined process based on the game ball entering the general winning hole 14. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 305.
In step 305, the main CPU 101 executes an out detection process for carrying out a predetermined process based on the detection of the gaming ball by the out sensor 19a, and then ends the sensor detection process.

Next, the gate detection process in step 300 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection sensor 20a. If it is judged that a detection signal has not been input from the gate detection sensor 20a, the gate detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal has been input from the gate detection sensor 20a, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal map reservation counter (i.e., the current normal map reservation number) is less than "4". If it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), the gate detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 obtains a winning determination random number and stores it in the regular pending memory area, and ends the gate detection processing.

Next, the processing at the time of detecting the first start winning port in step 301 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a. If it is judged that a detection signal has not been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the first start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal has been input from the first start winning hole detection sensor 15a, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 judges whether the value of the first special symbol reserved number counter (i.e., the current number of first special symbols reserved) is less than "4". If it is judged that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), the first start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first special symbol reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires the current jackpot determination random number and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 112, and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area in which the jackpot determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach group determination random number updated in the above-mentioned step 116, and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area in which the jackpot determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach mode determination random number updated in the above-mentioned step 116, and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area in which the jackpot determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 503. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern random number updated in the above-mentioned step 116, and stores it in the memory section of the first reserved memory area where the jackpot determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 503. As a result, the acquired jackpot determination random number, winning symbol random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and variation pattern random number are all stored in the memory section of the same first reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of the first start winning port ball entry counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first start winning port 15. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 509.
In step 509, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special random number has been stored and stores it in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the first start winning port detection process is terminated.

Next, the processing performed when the second start winning port is detected in step 302 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal is input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a. If it is judged that a detection signal is not input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, the second start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal is input from the second start winning hole detection sensor 16a, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601, the main CPU 101 judges whether the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter (i.e., the current number of second special symbols reserved) is less than "4". If it is judged that the value is not less than "4" (i.e., "4"), the second start winning hole detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires the current jackpot determination random number and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning symbol random number updated in the above-mentioned step 112, and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area in which the big win determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach group determination random number updated in the above-mentioned step 116, and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area in which the jackpot determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 acquires the reach mode determination random number updated in the above-mentioned step 116, and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area in which the jackpot determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 603. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 acquires the variation pattern random number updated in the above-mentioned step 116, and stores it in the memory section of the second reserved memory area in which the jackpot determination random number was stored in the above-mentioned step 603. As a result, the acquired jackpot determination random number, winning symbol random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and variation pattern random number are all stored in the memory section of the same second reserved memory area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of the second start winning port ball entry counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second start winning port 16. Then, the process proceeds to step 609.
In step 609, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special chart random number has been stored, stores it in the transmission data storage area for performance, and terminates the processing when the second start winning port is detected.

Next, the process of detecting the big prize opening in step 303 described above will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.
In step 610, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening detection sensor 18a. If it is judged that a detection signal has not been input from the large prize opening detection sensor 18a, the large prize opening detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal has been input from the large prize opening detection sensor 18a, the process proceeds to the next step 611.
In step 611, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of the special prize opening ball entry counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the special prize opening 18. Then, the special prize opening detection process is terminated.

Next, the process of detecting the general winning port in step 304 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general prize opening detection sensor 14a. If it is judged that a detection signal has not been input from the general prize opening detection sensor 14a, the general prize opening detection process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a detection signal has been input from the general prize opening detection sensor 14a, the process proceeds to the next step 651.
In step 651, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of the general winning port ball entry counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the general winning port 14. Then, the general winning port detection process is terminated.

Next, the above-mentioned out detection process in step 305 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it has received an out command (a command sent each time a game ball passes through the out passage) sent from the launch/payout control board 200. If it is judged that an out command has not been received, it ends the out detection process. On the other hand, if it is judged that an out command has been received, it proceeds to the next step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 decrements the ball difference count value by 1. Then, the out detection process ends.

Next, the special drawing related control processing in step 204 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 700, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of a plurality of function modules (subroutines) constituting the special symbol-related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data has data "00" indicating the execution of a special symbol variation start process described later, data "01" indicating the execution of a special symbol variation stop process described later, data "02" indicating the execution of a post-stop process described later, data "03" indicating the execution of a special game control process described later, and data "04" indicating the execution of a special game end process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 executes any one of the following processes based on the value of the execution phase data loaded in the above-mentioned step 700: special symbol variation start process (step 701), special symbol variation stop process (step 702), post-stop process (step 703), special game control process (step 704), or special game end process (step 705). Then, the special symbol-related control process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start process in step 701 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is "00" indicating the execution of the special symbol variation start process. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "00", the special symbol variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "00", the process proceeds to the next step 801.
In step 801, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the second special pattern random number is stored in the memory section of the second reserved memory area, that is, whether or not the second special pattern reserved number counter is "1" or more. If it is judged that the second special pattern random number is stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, if it is judged that the second special pattern random number is not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 judges whether the first special pattern random number is stored in the memory section of the first reserved memory area, that is, whether the first special pattern reserved number counter is "1" or more. If it is judged that the first special pattern random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 811. On the other hand, if it is judged that the first special pattern random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first reserved number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the first reserved memory area. Specifically, the random numbers stored in the first memory section of the first reserved memory area are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers stored in the second memory section to the fourth memory section of the first reserved memory area are shifted to a memory section with a smaller number by one. As a result, the random numbers stored in the first reserved memory area are used in the jackpot determination process described later in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to step 805.

In step 804, which is performed when it is determined in step 801 that the second special random number is stored, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second special reserved number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the second reserved memory area. Specifically, the random numbers stored in the first memory section of the second reserved memory area are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers stored in the second memory section to the fourth memory section of the second reserved memory area are shifted to a memory section with a smaller number by one. As a result, the random numbers stored in the second reserved memory area are used in the jackpot determination process described later in a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 executes a big win lottery process. Then, the process proceeds to step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, if the result of the lottery in step 805 is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 checks which start winning hole the game ball entered (i.e., the first start winning hole 15 or the second start winning hole 16) used in the lottery determination, and then selects the winning symbol random number determination table 111 corresponding to the check, and determines the type of special symbol based on the selected table and the winning symbol random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery in the above step 805 is a miss, if the jackpot determination random number used in the judgment of the lottery is due to the game ball entering the first start winning hole 15, the special symbol Y1 is determined, and if the jackpot determination random number used in the judgment of the lottery is due to the game ball entering the second start winning hole 16, the special symbol Y2 is determined. Then, data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. Also, in this special symbol determination process, the current game state, that is, the game state at the time when the special symbol was determined, is stored in the game state buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 807.
In addition, in the special pattern variation start processing of the pachinko machine P in this embodiment, when both the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number are stored, the second special pattern random number is processed in priority to the first special pattern random number, but this is not limited to this, and they may be processed in the order in which they are stored in the pending memory area.

In step 807, the main CPU 101 stores in the performance transmission data storage area a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 806. This causes information regarding the determined type of special symbol to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 808.
In step 808, the main CPU 101 executes a variable presentation pattern determination process for determining a variable presentation pattern based on the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variable pattern random number stored in the predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 809.

In step 809, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts a blinking display, and when the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol display device 31 starts a blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that "-" blinks at a predetermined interval on each display device.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol random number is stored in the first reserved memory area, the first special symbol reserved display device 38 is displayed in a manner in which the first special symbol reserved number can be recognized, and when the second special symbol random number is stored in the second reserved memory area, the second special symbol reserved display device 39 is displayed in a manner in which the second special symbol reserved number can be recognized. When the above-mentioned special symbol variable display is performed based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol reserved display device 38 is displayed and controlled to indicate that the first special symbol reserved number is reduced by one at the same time as the variable display starts, and when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display is performed based on the second special symbol random number, the second special symbol reserved display device 39 is displayed and controlled to indicate that the second special symbol reserved number is reduced by one at the same time as the variable display starts.
Then proceed to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "01" so that the special pattern change stop processing is executed in the special pattern related control processing, and ends the special pattern change start processing.
In step 811, which is performed when it is determined in step 802 that the first special random number is not stored in the first reserved memory area, the main CPU 101 executes a standby state start command determination process for transmitting a standby state start command indicating the start of a standby state in which no variable display is being performed to the sub-control board 300. The main control board 100 of this embodiment is provided with a storage flag, not shown, indicating whether the standby state start command has been stored in the performance transmission data storage area. When the storage flag is off, the main CPU 101 stores the standby state start command in the performance transmission data storage area, and when the storage flag is on, the main CPU 101 does not store the standby state start command in the performance transmission data storage area. When the main CPU 101 stores the standby state start command in the performance transmission data storage area, the storage flag is turned on, and when the start winning command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area (see step 608 above), the storage flag is turned off. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the standby state start command is stored in the transmission data storage area based on the start of the standby state, the standby state start command is not stored again during the standby state, and when the standby state starts again after the game ball enters one of the start winning holes and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the standby state start command is stored in the transmission data storage area for performance. Then, the special variable start process is terminated.

Next, the big win lottery process in step 805 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 loads the setting value stored in the first area of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not this setting value is a normal value (i.e., any value from "1" to "6"). If it is determined that this setting value is a normal value, the process proceeds to step 853. On the other hand, if it is determined that this setting value is not a normal value (i.e., a value less than "1" or a value greater than "6"), the process proceeds to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, and stores a game machine state flag indicating that in the first area. The main CPU 101 also executes a stop-related process based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related process is similar to the process executed when a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set (the process executed in step 137 described above), so a description thereof will be omitted here. Then, the process proceeds to step 852.

In step 852, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormality initialization process. The main CPU 101 also transmits a RAM clear command to the shot/dispense control board 200. Then, the process proceeds to step 200 of the timer interrupt process.
In step 853, which is reached when it is determined in step 850 that the set value is normal, the main CPU 101 selects one of the jackpot determination random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the set value stored in the main RAM 103 and the current game state, and executes a jackpot determination process that derives the lottery result of a jackpot based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804. Then, the jackpot lottery process ends.

Next, the variable presentation pattern determination process in step 808 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 806 is a big win symbol. If it is judged that the special symbol is not a big win symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 903. On the other hand, if it is judged that the special symbol is a big win symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 checks the big win symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 806 and the current game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 selects a corresponding reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 (jackpot judgment table) based on the jackpot symbol and the game state confirmed in the above-mentioned step 901. Then, the process proceeds to step 907.
In step 903, which is reached when it is determined in step 900 that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 checks the type of starting winning slot related to the lottery judgment (i.e., which starting winning slot the jackpot determination random number used in the lottery judgment was obtained by the ball entering), and checks the current game state and the current reserved number (reserved number of first special symbols, reserved number of second special symbols).Then, the process proceeds to the next step 904.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 selects the corresponding reach group determination random number judgment table 112 based on the type of the start winning slot, the game status, and the number of reserved balls confirmed in the above-mentioned step 903. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 905.
In step 905, the main CPU 101 determines the type of group based on the reach group determination random number stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 and the reach group determination random number judgment table 112 selected in step 904, and stores the group type in a predetermined processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 906.

In step 906, the main CPU 101 selects the reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 (loss judgment table) based on the type of group determined in the above-mentioned step 905. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 907.
In step 907, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern selection table 114 based on the reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 (jackpot judgment table) selected in the above-mentioned step 902 or the reach mode determination random number judgment table 113 (loss judgment table) selected in the above-mentioned step 906 and the reach mode determination random number stored in a predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804, and stores this determined fluctuation mode number in a predetermined temporary storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 908.

In step 908, the main CPU 101 selects (obtains) the variation pattern selection table 114 determined in the above-mentioned step 907. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 909.
In step 909, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern number based on the variation pattern selection table 114 selected in the above step 908 and the variation pattern random number stored in a predetermined processing area in the above step 803 or step 804, and stores the determined variation pattern number in a predetermined temporary storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 910.

In step 910, the main CPU 101 determines the variable time of the variable time based on the variable time determination table 115 and the variable mode number and the variable pattern number stored in a predetermined temporary storage area. The main CPU 101 also sets the determined variable time in the variable time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 911.
In step 911, the main CPU 101 generates a fluctuation mode command based on the fluctuation mode number stored in the specified temporary storage area, and generates a fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern number stored in the specified temporary storage area. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 stores the generated fluctuation mode command and fluctuation pattern command in the transmission data storage area for performance. Then, the fluctuation performance pattern determination process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation stop process in step 702 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is data "01" indicating the execution of the special symbol variation stop processing. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "01", the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "01", the process proceeds to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 judges whether the variable time set in the variable time timer counter in step 910 has elapsed. If it is judged that the variable time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the variable time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in the above-mentioned step 806 on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and executes the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been determined in the performance transmission data storage area.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display time for which the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a stop display time timer counter.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "02" so that post-stop processing is executed in the special symbol-related control processing. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing in step 703 mentioned above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is "02", which indicates execution of post-stop processing. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02", the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02", the process proceeds to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the stopped display time set in the stopped display time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1004 has elapsed. If it is judged that the stopped display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the stopped display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores the current game state in the game state buffer. The main CPU 101 also stores a stop display command indicating that the stop display time has elapsed in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes a time-shortening count update process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a time-shortening game flag indicating that the current game state is a time-shortening game state is on. If it is judged that the time-shortening game flag is on, it updates a time-shortening count storage area provided in the main RAM 103. In this time-shortening count storage area, the remaining number of fluctuations until the time-shortening game state ends is stored. Then, this stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". Also, if the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" as a result of updating the remaining number of fluctuations, it also executes a process to turn off the time-shortening game flag. Also, if it is judged that the time-shortening game flag is not on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any process. Then, it proceeds to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs a high probability count update process. Here, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a high probability game flag indicating that the current game state is a high probability game state is on. If it is judged that the high probability game flag is on, the high probability count storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. In this high probability count storage area, the remaining number of variations until the high probability game state ends is stored. Then, this stored remaining number of variations is decremented by "1". Also, if the remaining number of variations becomes "0" as a result of updating the remaining number of variations, a process of turning off the high probability game flag is also executed. Also, if it is judged that the high probability game flag is not on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1105.
In step 1105, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is a big win symbol. If it is judged that the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is not a big win symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it is judged that the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is a big win symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.

In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a game state command at the time of winning the jackpot for transmitting the game state at the time of winning the jackpot to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1107.
In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current game state. Then, the process proceeds to step 1108.

In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the waiting time set at the start of the special game in an opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process is to start in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1109.
In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is the special symbol X1, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "10", and if the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is the special symbol X2, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds to "4". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1110.

In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "03" so that the special game control process is executed in the special chart related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.
In step 1111, which is reached when it is determined in step 1105 that the special symbol displayed in a stopped state is not a big win symbol, the main CPU 101 checks the current game state and stores a game state command indicating the game state in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step 1112.

In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the special symbol variation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop process is terminated.

Next, the special game control process in step 704 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is "03", which indicates the execution of the special game control process. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "03", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "03", the process proceeds to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1108 has elapsed. If it is judged that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special game control process is currently in ending processing, which is a standby process that is performed after all rounds of play have ended. If it is determined that ending processing is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step 1209. On the other hand, if it is determined that ending processing is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 1203.

In step 1203, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not it is the time when each round of play has started. If it is judged that each round of play has not started, the process proceeds to step 1205. On the other hand, if it is judged that each round of play has started, the process proceeds to the next step 1204.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, at the start of each round of play, the opening time (29.0 seconds) for the big prize opening 18 to be opened in each round of play is set in the big prize opening timer counter based on the special electric role operation table 116 corresponding to the type of the big prize symbol stopped and displayed. The main CPU 101 is able to determine whether or not each round of play has started by checking the value of this big prize opening timer counter.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of the round game in the performance transmission data storage area. The main CPU 101 also turns on a special prize opening flag indicating that the special prize opening 18 is being opened. This special prize opening flag is turned off at the start of the special game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1205.
In addition, a round play start command is provided for each number of round plays, which makes it possible to transmit to the sub-control board 300 which number of round plays that has started.

In step 1205, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the round game has ended. If it is judged that the round game has not ended, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the round game has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 1206.
In addition, the main CPU 101 can determine whether or not a round of play has ended by checking whether the opening time set in the large prize opening timer counter has elapsed or whether 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 18.
In step 1206, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". The main CPU 101 also turns off the special prize opening flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 1207.

In step 1207, the main CPU 101 judges whether the number of rounds decremented in step 1206 is "0". If it is judged that the number of rounds is not "0", the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the number of rounds is "0", the process proceeds to the next step 1208.
In step 1208, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and stores an ending command indicating that the ending process is to start in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the special game control process is terminated.

In step 1209, which is reached when it is determined in step 1202 that the ending process is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1208 has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1210.
In step 1210, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command, which indicates that the special game has ended, in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "04" so that the special game end process is executed in the special chart related control process. Then, the special game control process is ended.

Next, the special game ending process in step 705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 judges whether the execution phase data is "04", which indicates the execution of the special game end process. If it is judged that the execution phase data is not "04", the special game end process is ended. On the other hand, if it is judged that the execution phase data is "04", the process proceeds to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 checks the jackpot symbol (stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the ended special game, and sets the game state after the end of the special game based on the game state setting table 117 corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets a high probability game flag, a time-saving game flag, a high probability number of times, and a time-saving number of times. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, even if the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is either the special symbol X1 or X2, both the high probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are turned on, and both the high probability number of times and the time-saving number of times are set to "100". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 stores a game state designation command in the performance transmission data storage area according to the game state set in the above-mentioned step 1301. This game state designation command includes information that the high probability game flag set in the above-mentioned step 1301 is on, information that the time-saving game flag is on, information on the number of high probability games, and information on the number of time-saving games. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "00" so that the special symbol variation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the special game end process is ended.

Next, the map-related control process in step 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the normal pattern execution phase data. This normal pattern execution phase data indicates which of the multiple function modules (subroutines) constituting the normal pattern related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this normal pattern execution phase data has data "10" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation start process described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation stop process described later, data "12" indicating the execution of the normal pattern stop post-processing described later, and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 executes either the normal symbol variation start process (step 1401), the normal symbol variation stop process (step 1402), the normal symbol stop post-stop process (step 1403), or the movable piece control process (step 1404) based on the value of the normal symbol execution phase data loaded in the above-mentioned step 1400. Then, the normal symbol related control process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing in step 1401 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal pattern execution phase data is "10" which indicates the execution of the normal pattern variation start process. If it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is not "10", the normal pattern variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is "10", the process proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 judges whether a winning random number is stored in the normal reserved memory area, i.e., whether the normal reserved number counter is "1" or more. If it is judged that the normal reserved number counter is not "1" or more (i.e., "0"), the normal pattern variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal reserved number counter is "1" or more, the process proceeds to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the reserved number counter by "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process of the regular reserved memory area. Specifically, the winning determination random number stored in the first memory unit is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the winning determination random numbers stored in the second memory unit to the fourth memory unit are shifted to a memory unit with a smaller number by one. As a result, the winning determination random numbers stored in the regular reserved memory area are used in the winning determination process described below in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 executes a normal symbol lottery process. Then, the process proceeds to step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 checks whether the current game state is set to a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, and sets the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter to the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the current game state by referring to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 119. Specifically, if the current game state is a non-time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol fluctuation time counter to "13 seconds", and if the current game state is a time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol fluctuation time counter to "0.6 seconds". Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1506.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display data for starting the variable display of the normal symbol. This causes the normal symbol display device 32 to start blinking. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the winning determination random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation memory area, the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is displayed in a manner that allows the number of reserved normal symbols to be recognized. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, the display of the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is controlled so as to indicate that the number of reserved normal symbols is reduced by one at the same time as the variable display starts. Then, proceed to the next step 1507.
In step 1507, the main CPU 101 stores the current game state in the game state buffer as the game state at the start of the fluctuation. Then, the process proceeds to step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 sets the regular pattern execution phase data to "11" so that the regular pattern change stop process is executed in the regular pattern related control process. Then, the regular pattern change start process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol lottery process in step 1504 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1550, the main CPU 101 loads the setting value stored in the first area of the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not this setting value is a normal value (i.e., any value from "1" to "6"). If it is determined that this setting value is a normal value, the process proceeds to step 1553. On the other hand, if it is determined that this setting value is not a normal value (i.e., a value less than "1" or a value greater than "6"), the process proceeds to the next step 1551.
In step 1551, the main CPU 101 sets a game stop state based on the occurrence of a setting value abnormality, and stores a game machine state flag indicating that in the first area. The main CPU 101 also executes a stop-related process based on the setting of the game stop state. This stop-related process is similar to the process executed when a game stop state based on the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is set (the process executed in step 137 described above), so a description thereof will be omitted here. Then, the process proceeds to step 1552.

In step 1552, the main CPU 101 executes an abnormality initialization process. Also, the main CPU 101 transmits a RAM clear command to the shot/dispense control board 200. Then, the process proceeds to step 200 of the timer interrupt process.
In step 1553, which is reached when the set value is determined to be normal in step 1550, the main CPU 101 selects the winning determination random number determination table 118 (either the non-time-saving determination table 118a or the time-saving determination table 118b) corresponding to the current game state, and executes a winning determination process to derive the result of the lottery for the normal symbol based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 1503. Specifically, when the current game state is a non-time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 refers to the non-time-saving determination table 118a to determine the winning determination random number stored in the predetermined processing area. On the other hand, when the current game state is a time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 refers to the time-saving determination table 118b to determine the winning determination random number stored in the predetermined processing area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1554.

In step 1554, the main CPU 101 stores the stopped display data of the normal symbols based on the result of the winning determination process in the above-mentioned step 1553 in a predetermined normal symbol memory area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, if the result of the winning determination process is a win, the winning symbol data is stored in the predetermined normal symbol memory area, and if the result of the winning determination process is a loss, the losing symbol data is stored in the predetermined normal symbol memory area. Then, the normal symbol lottery process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation stop processing in step 1402 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal pattern execution phase data is data "11" indicating the execution of the normal pattern variation stop processing. If it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is not "11", the normal pattern variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal pattern execution phase data is "11", the process proceeds to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal symbol variation time set in the normal symbol variation time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1505 has elapsed. If it is judged that the variation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol variation stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the variation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets the stop display data (winning symbol data, losing symbol data) for stopping and displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stopping and displaying of the normal symbols. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal symbol in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "12" so that normal symbol post-stop processing is executed in the normal symbol-related control processing. Then, the normal symbol change stop processing is terminated.

Next, the post-stop processing of the normal symbols in step 1403 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "12" indicating the execution of normal symbol stop post-processing. If it is judged that the normal symbol execution phase data is not "12", the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal symbol execution phase data is "12", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal symbol stop display time set in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter in the above-mentioned step 1603 has elapsed. If it is judged that the normal symbol stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 judges whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is judged that the stopped normal symbol is not a winning symbol (i.e., a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1704. On the other hand, if it is judged that the stopped normal symbol is a winning symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "13" so that the movable piece control process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is terminated.

In step 1704, which is reached when it is determined in step 1702 that the normal symbol displayed as stopped is not a winning symbol, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol change start process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol post-stop process is terminated.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 judges whether the normal map execution phase data is data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process. If it is judged that the normal map execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the normal map execution phase data is "13", the process proceeds to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 judges whether the movable piece 16b is under operation control, that is, whether the start winning port solenoid 16c is energized. If it is judged that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the process proceeds to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is judged that the movable piece 16b is not under operation control, the process proceeds to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the main CPU 101 checks whether the game state at the start of the variation of the normal symbols was a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second start winning hole opening control table 120, and sets the number of energizations (number of openings) and energization time (opening time) as the energization control data (opening data) of the start winning hole solenoid 16c according to the game state confirmed in the above-mentioned step 1802. In addition, the main CPU 101 turns on the second start winning hole opening flag, which indicates that the second start winning hole 16 is being opened. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

In step 1804, which is reached if it is determined in step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current-carrying time (opening time) set in step 1803 has elapsed. If it is determined that the current-carrying time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current-carrying time (opening time) has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 turns off the second start winning port opening flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol variation start process is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the movable piece control process is terminated.

Next, the solenoid control process in step 210 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1850, the main CPU 101 sets the closing data for closing the second start winning port 16 (closing the movable piece 16b, not energizing the start winning port solenoid 16c) as the start winning port solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1851.
In step 1851, the main CPU 101 sets closing data for closing the large prize opening 18 (closing the opening/closing door 18b, not energizing the large prize opening solenoid 18c) as the large prize opening solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1852.

In step 1852, the main CPU 101 judges whether the current control state is a playable state and whether the state related to the difference ball operation stop control is other than the activation state (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state). If it is judged that the state is not a playable state (i.e., a game stop state, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state), or that the state is a playable state but not other than the activation state (i.e., an activation state), the solenoid control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the state is a playable state and other than the activation state, the process proceeds to the next step 1853.
In step 1853, the main CPU 101 judges whether the second start winning port flag is on or not. If it is judged that the second start winning port flag is not on (i.e., it is off), the solenoid control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the second start winning port flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1854.

In step 1854, the main CPU 101 sets the opening data for opening the second start winning hole 16 (opening the movable piece 16b, energizing the start winning hole solenoid 16c) as the start winning hole solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1855.
In step 1855, the main CPU 101 judges whether the large prize opening flag is on or not. If it is judged that the large prize opening flag is not on (i.e., it is off), the solenoid control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the large prize opening flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1856.

In step 1856, the main CPU 101 sets opening data for opening the large prize opening 18 (opening the opening door 18b, energizing the large prize opening solenoid 18c) as the large prize opening solenoid data in a predetermined solenoid data storage area. Then, the solenoid control process is terminated.
By carrying out the above-mentioned processing, when the close data is set, the movable piece 16b closes to close the second start winning opening 16, and the opening and closing door 18b closes to close the large winning opening 18. On the other hand, when the open data is set, the movable piece 16b opens to open the second start winning opening 16, and the opening and closing door 18b opens to open the large winning opening 18. Also, when the game is not in a playable state, and when the game is in a playable state but in an activated state, the close data is set. Therefore, the second start winning opening 16 and the large winning opening 18 are always closed in the game stop state, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, and the activation state.
This solenoid control process is executed in a timer interrupt process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). That is, in the game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, and activation state, the process of restricting the operation of the movable piece 16b and the opening and closing door 18b is performed at a predetermined timing.

Next, the ball difference related command set process in step 214 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1870, the main CPU 101 judges whether the control state during the current time is a playable state or not. If it is judged that the control state is not a playable state, the difference ball related command set process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the control state is a playable state, the process proceeds to the next step 1871.
In step 1871, the main CPU 101 judges whether the difference ball operation stop control phase data has been changed. If it is judged that the difference ball operation stop control phase data has not been changed, the difference ball related command set process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the difference ball operation stop control phase data has been changed, the process proceeds to the next step 1872.
The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a management buffer that is configured by a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. When the difference ball operation stop control phase data is cleared and a state value corresponding to the state before the activation warning is stored in this difference ball operation stop control phase data, the state value corresponding to the state before the activation warning is also stored in the management buffer accordingly. After that, when the state related to the difference ball operation stop control is changed, first, the state value corresponding to the changed state is stored only in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. Then, in this step 1871, it is determined whether the state value stored in the difference ball operation stop control phase data and the state value stored in the management buffer match, and if they match, it is determined that the difference ball operation stop control phase data has not been changed. On the other hand, if they do not match, it is determined that the difference ball operation stop control phase data has been changed, and the state value stored in the difference ball operation stop control phase data is also stored in the management buffer accordingly.

In step 1872, the main CPU 101 stores either a first difference ball operation stop control designation command, a second difference ball operation stop control designation command, or a third difference ball operation stop control designation command in the performance transmission data storage area, depending on the state value stored in the difference ball operation stop control phase data.
Specifically, when a state value corresponding to the activation warning state is stored in the differential ball activation stop control phase data (i.e., when the activation warning state is set), the first differential ball activation stop control designation command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the first differential ball activation stop control designation command to be sent to the sub-control board 300, and the fact that the activation warning state has been set can also be understood by the sub-control board 300.
When a state value corresponding to the activation notice state is stored in the difference ball activation stop control phase data (i.e., when the activation notice state is set), the second difference ball activation stop control designation command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the second difference ball activation stop control designation command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300, and the fact that the activation notice state has been set can also be grasped by the sub-control board 300.
When a state value corresponding to the activation state is stored in the difference ball activation stop control phase data (i.e., when the activation state is set), a third difference ball activation stop control designation command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the third difference ball activation stop control designation command to be sent to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 can also understand that the activation state has been set. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sends an activation state setting command indicating that the activation state has been set to the launch/payout control board 200. This allows the launch/payout control board 200 to also understand that the activation state has been set.
Then, the difference ball related command set process ends.

Next, the difference ball judgment control process in step 215 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1880, the main CPU 101 judges whether the control state during the current time is a playable state or not. If it is judged that the control state is not a playable state, the main CPU 101 ends the ball difference judgment control process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the control state is a playable state, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 1881.
In step 1881, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a first reference value reaching flag (a flag provided on the main control board 100) indicating that the ball difference count value has reached the first reference value is off. If it is determined that the first reference value reaching flag is not off (i.e., it is on), the process proceeds to step 1884. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first reference value reaching flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1882.
The first reference value reaching flag is set to be turned off when the ball difference count value is reset.

In step 1882, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the difference ball count value has reached a first reference value. If it is judged that the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value, the process proceeds to step 1884. On the other hand, if it is judged that the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value, the process proceeds to the next step 1883.
In step 1883, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation warning state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation warning state. The main CPU 101 also turns on the first reference value arrival flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1884.

In step 1884, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a second reference value reaching flag (a flag provided on the main control board 100) indicating that the ball difference count value has reached the second reference value is off. If the main CPU 101 determines that the second reference value reaching flag is not off (i.e., is on), the process proceeds to step 1889. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the second reference value reaching flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1885.
The second reference value reaching flag is set to be turned off when the ball difference count value is reset.
In step 1885, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not the difference ball count value has reached the second reference value. If it is judged that the difference ball count value has not reached the second reference value, the process proceeds to step 1889. On the other hand, if it is judged that the difference ball count value has reached the second reference value, the process proceeds to the next step 1886.

In step 1886, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a special game is being played. If it is judged that a special game is not being played, the process proceeds to step 1888. On the other hand, if it is judged that a special game is being played, the process proceeds to the next step 1887.
In step 1887, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation notice state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation notice state. The main CPU 101 also turns on the second reference value arrival flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 1889.

In step 1888, which is reached when it is determined in step 1886 that the special game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation state. The main CPU 101 also turns on the second reference value arrival flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1889.
In step 1889, the main CPU 101 judges whether or not a state value corresponding to the activation notice state is stored in the difference ball operation stop control phase data (i.e., whether or not the activation notice state is in progress). If it is judged that a state value corresponding to the activation notice state is not stored, the difference ball judgment control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that a state value corresponding to the activation notice state is stored, the process proceeds to step 1890.

In step 1890, the main CPU 101 judges whether the special game has ended. If it is judged that the special game has not ended, the main CPU 101 ends the ball difference judgment control process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the special game has ended, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 1891.
In step 1891, the main CPU 101 stores a state value corresponding to the activation state in the difference ball operation stop control phase data. This sets the activation state. Then, the difference ball determination control process ends.

Next, the setting-related processing in step 218 mentioned above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 1900, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current control state is a setting change state. If it is determined that the current control state is not a setting change state, the process proceeds to step 1908. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current control state is a setting change state, the process proceeds to the next step 1901.
In step 1901, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 108 is off. If it is determined that the setting switch 108 is off, the process proceeds to step 1905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch 108 is not off (i.e., is on), the process proceeds to the next step 1902.

In step 1902, the main CPU 101 judges whether the RAM clear switch 109 is on or not. If it is judged that the RAM clear switch 109 is not on (i.e., off), the setting-related processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the RAM clear switch 109 is on, the processing proceeds to the next step 1903.
In step 1903, the main CPU 101 determines whether the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on or not (i.e., whether the main body frame 2 is open or not). Specifically, if a main body frame open command transmitted from the launch/dispatch control board 200 has been received, the main CPU 101 determines that the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on. Then, if it is determined that the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is not on (i.e., it is off), the setting-related processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the main body frame open detection sensor 2a is on, the process proceeds to the next step 1904.

In step 1904, the main CPU 101 changes the setting value stored in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the setting value currently stored is changed to a setting value incremented by 1. Then, the setting change process is terminated.
In step 1905, which is reached when it is determined in step 1901 that the setting switch 108 is off, the main CPU 101 stores a setting change state end command, which indicates that the setting change state has ended and a playable state has been set, in the performance transmission data storage area. The command stored here is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in step 114. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 1906.

In step 1906, the main CPU 101 stores various commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 (for example, a command for displaying an initial screen on the performance display device 21) in a performance transmission data storage area.
In step 1907, the main CPU 101 sets the gameable state and stores a gaming machine state flag indicating that in the first area, and then ends the setting-related processing.

In step 1908, which is reached if it is determined in step 1900 that the current control state is not the setting change state, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting switch 108 is off. If it is determined that the setting switch 108 is not off, the setting change process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch 108 is off, the process proceeds to the next step 1909.
In step 1909, the main CPU 101 stores a setting confirmation state end command, which indicates that the setting confirmation state has ended and the gameable state has been set, in the performance transmission data storage area. The command stored here is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in the above-mentioned step 114. Then, the process proceeds to step 1906.

(Outline of processing in the sub-control board 300 of the pachinko machine P)
As described above, the special game, normal game, and special game progress by executing various processes in the main control board 100. During the progress of these games, various commands are sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 controls various effects and various suggestions that accompany the progress of the game based on the reception of the above-mentioned commands. In addition, the sub-control board 300 controls changes to the current speaker volume (the volume of the sound output device 10 being set) based on the pressing of the up key or down key on the cross key 25.
Below, an overview of the various effects and suggestions executed in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be explained.

(Summary of the variable effects)
During a normal game state or a high probability time-saving game state, a variable performance is executed which suggests the result of a lottery for a big win by the stopped display mode of the performance pattern 50 in conjunction with the variable display of the special pattern.
In the variable presentation, the presentation symbols 50 (dummy symbols) are displayed in a variable manner, superimposed on a background image (not shown) displayed on the display unit 21a of the presentation display device 21. The result of the lottery for a big win is suggested to the player by the combination (stop display mode) of the presentation symbols 50 that are stopped and displayed after the variable presentation.

In this embodiment, the performance pattern 50 is a number pattern that represents the numbers "1" to "9" (see FIG. 51(a)). In the variable display of the performance pattern 50, the performance pattern 50, which is the number pattern of "1" to "9", is displayed in a cyclical manner in ascending order (i.e., "1" → "2" → ... "8" → "9" → "1" → "2" → ...).
Specifically, although not shown in the figure, when the variable display of the special pattern starts, all the performance patterns 50 start to scroll downward from the state where they are stopped (the state of the previous stop display), and then the scroll speed gradually increases, and all the performance patterns 50 are scrolled at high speed. During this high-speed scroll display, the performance patterns 50 are not visible. After that, the scroll speed of the performance pattern 50 located on the left side (hereinafter also referred to as the left performance pattern 50L, the first stop pattern) gradually decreases, and the left performance pattern 50L is displayed stopped, next, the scroll speed of the performance pattern 50 located on the right side (hereinafter also referred to as the right performance pattern 50R, the second stop pattern) gradually decreases, and the right performance pattern 50R is displayed stopped, and finally, the scroll speed of the performance pattern 50 located in the center (hereinafter also referred to as the middle performance pattern 50C, the third stop pattern) gradually decreases, and the middle performance pattern 50C is displayed stopped.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the left performance pattern 50L, the middle performance pattern 50C, and the right performance pattern 50R are displayed in a horizontal line in the approximate center of the display unit 21a (see FIG. 51(b)). That is, the stop display position of the left performance pattern 50L (hereinafter also referred to as the left stop display position) is approximately the center of the left part of the display unit 21a, the stop display position of the middle performance pattern 50C (hereinafter also referred to as the middle stop display position) is approximately the center of the display unit 21a, and the stop display position of the right performance pattern 50R (hereinafter also referred to as the right stop display position) is approximately the center of the right part of the display unit 21a (see FIG. 51(b)).
In addition, the downward arrow in Figure 51 indicates that the performance pattern 50 is displayed scrolling from top to bottom.

If the result of the lottery for the big win is a big win, all the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed with the same number pattern (see FIG. 51(b)). In other words, the fact that all the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed with the same number pattern suggests that the result of the lottery for the big win is a big win.
On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, although not specifically shown, at least one performance pattern 50 is displayed stopped with a number pattern different from the other performance patterns 50, thereby indicating that the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss.

The third stop pattern is displayed almost simultaneously with the special pattern being displayed on the first special pattern display device 30 or the second special pattern display device 31. This prevents the special pattern from being displayed on the first special pattern display device 30 or the second special pattern display device 31 before the performance pattern 50 is displayed, and prevents the result of the jackpot lottery from being determined by the type of special pattern.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the period from when the display of the changing performance pattern 50 begins to change until the second stop pattern is displayed stopped (until the presence or absence of a reach display, which will be described later, is indicated) corresponds to the first half of the changing performance, and the period from when the second stop pattern is displayed stopped (from when the presence or absence of a reach display is indicated) to when the third stop pattern is displayed stopped (until the change of the performance pattern 50 ends) corresponds to the second half of the changing performance.
As the form of the first half of the variation performance, there are provided a no-reach variation pattern in which the first and second stop patterns are stopped and displayed with different number patterns, and a reach variation pattern in which the first and second stop patterns are stopped and displayed with the same number pattern (a reach display is performed). The no-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern each have a plurality of forms, and each form has various settings such as the way of displaying the variation of the performance pattern 50 and the presence or absence of a performance executed in conjunction with the variation display of the performance pattern 50.
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to the received fluctuation mode command is "00H", the first half of the fluctuation performance is executed by the no-reach fluctuation pattern, and when it is other than "00H", the first half of the fluctuation performance is executed by the reach fluctuation pattern.

As the no-reach fluctuation patterns, a no-reach pattern A and a no-reach pattern B are provided.
Although not specifically shown, no-reach pattern A is a mode in which there is no particular change in the way in which the changing display of the performance pattern 50 occurs, and further, no other effects are executed in conjunction with the changing display of the performance pattern 50, and the first and second stopping patterns are displayed as different numerical patterns.
Although not shown in particular, the no-reach pattern B is a mode in which a first half cut-in effect is executed to display a predetermined first half cut-in image CP1 (for example, an oval image with the word "chance" displayed) approximately in the center of the display unit 21a during the period from when the varying display of all the performance symbols 50 starts until the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the first and second stop symbols are stopped and displayed with different number patterns. The first half cut-in effect in the no-reach pattern B starts when the high-speed scrolling display of all the performance symbols 50 starts, and ends when the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the no-reach pattern B, a first half cut-in image CP1 (hereinafter also referred to as a blue cut-in image CP1-1) with the word "chance" written in blue is displayed.

As the reach fluctuation pattern, a reach pattern A and a reach pattern B are provided.
Reach pattern A, although not specifically shown, is a mode in which a reach display is achieved by simply displaying the first and second stopping patterns as the same numerical pattern without any particular change in the way in which the changing display of the performance pattern 50 occurs, and further without any other performance being executed in conjunction with the changing display of the performance pattern 50.

Although not shown in particular, the reach pattern B is a mode in which the reach display is performed after the above-mentioned first half cut-in performance is executed. The first half cut-in performance in the reach pattern B starts at the start of the high-speed scrolling display of all the performance symbols 50, and ends at the execution of the reach display (i.e., the stop display of the second stop symbol).
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, three types of reach patterns B, namely, reach patterns B1, B2, and B3, which have different display modes of the first half cut-in image CP1, are provided as the reach pattern B. In the reach pattern B1, a blue cut-in image CP1-1 is displayed, in the reach pattern B2, a cut-in image CP1 with the word "chance" written in red (hereinafter also referred to as a red cut-in image CP1-2) is displayed, and in the reach pattern B3, a cut-in image with the word "chance" written in rainbow colors (hereinafter also referred to as a rainbow cut-in image CP1-3) is displayed.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the likelihood of each of the above-mentioned reach variation patterns being executed in the event of a jackpot is set separately, so that the player's expectations for a jackpot can be changed according to the reach variation pattern being executed.
For example, with regard to the reach pattern B, the reach pattern B2 is set to be more likely to be executed when a jackpot is won than the reach pattern B1. Also, the reach pattern B3 is set to be executed only when a jackpot is won and the special symbol X1 (a special symbol that determines the execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of round play are played) is determined. That is, the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher when the red cut-in image CP1-2 is displayed than when the blue cut-in image CP1-1 is displayed. Also, when the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed, the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of round play are played (see FIG. 14(a)) are confirmed.

In addition, the no-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern may be not only a pattern in which the performance patterns 50 are stopped and displayed in the order of left performance pattern 50L → right performance pattern 50R → middle performance pattern 50C, but also a pattern in which the performance patterns 50 are stopped and displayed in the order of right performance pattern 50R → left performance pattern 50L → middle performance pattern 50C, a pattern in which the left performance pattern 50L and the right performance pattern 50R are stopped and displayed simultaneously and then the middle performance pattern 50C is stopped and displayed, a pattern in which the time from the first stop pattern to the second stop pattern is stopped and displayed is longer than the time from the start of the changing display of all performance patterns 50 to the first stop pattern is stopped and displayed, and a pattern in which the time from the first stop pattern to the second stop pattern is stopped and displayed is shorter than the time from the start of the changing display of all performance patterns 50 to the first stop pattern is stopped and displayed, etc.
In addition, as the no-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern, a mode in which all the performance patterns 50 temporarily stop in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first and second stop patterns temporarily stop at number patterns differing by one, and the third stop pattern temporarily stops at a temporary stop pattern suggesting a temporary stop) and then the variable display is resumed a predetermined number of times (a so-called pseudo consecutive performance is performed), or a mode in which a reel rotation performance is executed between the start of the variable display of the performance patterns 50 and the stop display of the second stop pattern, etc. may be provided.

As the mode of the latter half of the variable performance when the mode of the first half of the variable performance is a reach variable pattern, although not particularly shown, a reach development performance is executed in which a predetermined development performance image is displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 after the reach display, and a role rotation performance is executed during this reach development performance, and then a development pattern is provided which suggests the result of the jackpot lottery, and a no development pattern is provided which suggests the result of the jackpot lottery without executing the reach development performance after the reach display. The development pattern is set to be highly likely to be executed if a jackpot is won, and therefore increases the player's sense of expectation.
When the mode of the first half of the variable presentation is a no-reach variable pattern, the mode of the second half of the variable presentation is a normal miss pattern, which suggests that the result of the jackpot lottery after the second half variable time has elapsed, although not shown in the figure.
In addition, there are multiple types of patterns for the no-development pattern, the development pattern, and the normal miss pattern, and various methods of displaying the variation of the performance symbols 50, the types of development performance images, the modes of the role rotation performance, etc. are set. For example, as a mode of the development pattern, a mode in which a latter cut-in performance is executed in which a latter cut-in image suggesting the expectation of a big win is displayed during the execution of the reach development performance, etc. may be set.

In addition, in the above-mentioned variable performance, not only are various images displayed, but in conjunction with the display of the various images, predetermined background music and sound are output from the audio output device 10 (speaker), and the performance lighting device 23 (lamp) emits light in a predetermined lighting pattern and color.

(Determination of the mode of variable performance)
Next, the determination of the above-mentioned variable presentation mode will be explained.
A variable performance determination table 121 for determining the mode of the variable performance (mode of the first half of the variable performance, mode of the second half of the variable performance) is stored in the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300. The sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 selects a variable performance determination table 121 according to a predetermined condition, and determines the mode of the variable performance based on the selected variable performance determination table 121, the variable mode number (variation mode command) and the variable pattern number (variation pattern command) received from the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100, and an arbitrarily used performance random number (variation performance random number).

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a variable presentation determination table A and a variable presentation determination table B are provided as the variable presentation determination table 121.
The variable effect determination table A is a table selected when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value and the determined special symbol is other than the jackpot symbol X1 (i.e., the jackpot symbol X2, the miss symbol Y1 or Y2), or after the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value (i.e., after the activation warning state has been set) regardless of the determined special symbol. The variable effect determination table B is a table selected when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value and the determined special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1.

When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives the variation mode command and the variation pattern command, it checks whether the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value (whether it has already reached it) based on a first reference value arrival flag described later, and when the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value, it selects the variation presentation determination table A. On the other hand, when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value, it checks the type of the determined special symbol, and when the determined special symbol is other than the jackpot symbol X1, it selects the variation presentation determination table A, and when the determined special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1, it selects the variation presentation determination table B.
Then, the sub-CPU 301 acquires a variable performance random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and then refers to the selected variable performance decision table 121 to determine the mode of the variable performance based on the acquired variable performance random number, the variable mode number corresponding to the received variable mode command, and the variable pattern number corresponding to the variable pattern command.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), according to the variable performance determination table A, if the received variable mode number is "00H" and the received variable pattern number is "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H" or "04H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game mode or the high probability time-saving game mode is a miss), then either a mode in which the first half is "no reach pattern A" and the second half is "normal miss pattern" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 1), or a mode in which the first half is "no reach pattern B" and the second half is "normal miss pattern" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 2) is determined.

If the received variation mode number is "01H" and the received variation pattern number is "05H" (if the result of the lottery for a jackpot in the normal game mode or the high probability time-saving game mode is a miss), the first half is determined to be "reach pattern A" and the second half is determined to be "no development pattern" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 3).

If the received fluctuation mode number is "02H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "06H" or "07H" (if the result of the lottery for a jackpot in the normal game mode or the high probability time-saving game mode is a miss), then either the mode in which the first half is "reach pattern A" and the second half is "pattern with development" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 4), or the mode in which the first half is "reach pattern B1" and the second half is "pattern with development" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 5) is determined.

If the received variation mode number is "03H" and the received variation pattern number is "06H" or "07H" (if the result of the lottery for a jackpot in the normal game mode or the high probability time-saving game mode is a miss), then either mode 4, mode 5, or a mode in which the first half is "reach pattern B2" and the second half is "development pattern" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 6) will be determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "01H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H", or if the received fluctuation mode number is "02H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot), then either mode 4, mode 5, or mode 6 will be determined.

If the received variation mode number is "03H" and the received variation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot), either mode 5 or mode 6 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A2H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" (if the result of the lottery for a jackpot in the high probability time-saving game state is a jackpot), either mode 4, mode 5, or mode 6 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A3H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the lottery for a jackpot in the high probability time-saving game state is a jackpot), either mode 5 or mode 6 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 52(b), according to the variable effect determination table B, if the received variable mode number is "01H" and the received variable pattern number is "A6H", or if the received variable mode number is "02H" and the received variable pattern number is "A6H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, or a mode in which the first half is "reach pattern B3" and the second half is "development pattern" (hereinafter also referred to as mode 7) is determined.

If the received variation mode number is "03H" and the received variation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state is a jackpot), then either mode 5, mode 6 or mode 7 will be determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A2H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" (if the result of the lottery for a jackpot in the high probability time-saving game state is a jackpot), then either mode 4, mode 5, mode 6 or mode 7 is determined.

If the received fluctuation mode number is "A3H" and the received fluctuation pattern number is "A6H" or "A7H" (if the result of the lottery for a jackpot in the high probability time-saving game state is a jackpot), then either mode 5, mode 6, or mode 7 will be determined.

In addition, in Figures 52 (a) and (b), the numbers shown in each selection area in which the variation mode number and variation pattern number are associated with the variation presentation style indicate the range of random numbers assigned to that selection area, i.e., the selection ratio of that selection area.

Here, mode 7 (a mode in which the first half is "reach pattern B3" and the second half is "development pattern") is not determined in variable performance determination table A, but only in variable performance determination table B (see Figures 52 (a) and (b)).
As described above, the variable effect determination table A is selected when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value and the determined special symbol is other than the big win symbol X1, or after the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value regardless of the determined special symbol. On the other hand, the variable effect determination table B is selected when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value and the determined special symbol is the big win symbol X1.
In this way, in the case of a miss, or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, mode 7 is not determined regardless of whether or not the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, mode 7 may be determined when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value, and mode 7 is not determined after the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value.
That is, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, in relation to the determined special pattern, the variable presentation according to mode 7 can be executed only when the jackpot pattern X1 is determined based on the winning of a jackpot, but while the execution of the variable presentation according to mode 7 is not restricted when the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value, the execution of the variable presentation according to mode 7 is restricted after the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value.

As described above, in mode 7, the first half of the variable performance is the "reach pattern B3" mode, so the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed in the first half cut-in performance. Since mode 7 is executed only when the jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, when the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed, the jackpot is won and the special game (see FIG. 14) in which 10 rounds of round play are played and many prize balls can be obtained is confirmed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the display of the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 can give the player a great sense of elation, and can increase the interest of the game.
On the other hand, as described above, when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, an activation warning state is set, and an activation warning suggestion is made that the second reference value will soon be reached (see FIG. 51(f)). After that, when the activation state is set based on the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value, the game stops. As described later, for example, in a case where a change display of the performance pattern 50 is being performed in conjunction with the change display of the special pattern, the change display of the performance pattern 50 is forcibly ended and the change display is cleared. In other words, the change display being performed is forcibly ended.

Here, if the setting is made such that the variable presentation according to mode 7 can be executed even after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, when the jackpot is won during the activation warning state and the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the variable presentation according to mode 7 may be determined and the rainbow cut-in image CP-1 may be displayed. In this case, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value during the execution of the variable presentation according to mode 7, the game is stopped and the variable presentation being executed is also forcibly terminated. Then, even though the player was aware in advance of the execution of the special game in which the round play of 10 rounds is performed due to the display of the rainbow cut-in image CP-1, the game stops without the special game being executed, which may give the player a great sense of loss and reduce the interest in the game.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value (after the activation warning suggestion is executed), even if the jackpot is won and the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, the variable presentation according to the aspect 7 is not determined. This limits the display of the rainbow cut-in image CP-1, which prevents the player from feeling a sense of loss as described above, and thus prevents the player from losing interest in the game.

(Summary of Hold Display)
During the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state, when the first special chart random number or the second special chart random number is acquired and stored as reserved, or when the first special chart random number or the second special chart random number stored as reserved is read out, a reserved display is performed to display a reserved image 52 in a predetermined display mode (see Fig. 51 (a) to (b), (d)). This reserved display indicates the reserved number of the first special chart or the reserved number of the second special chart. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the reserved display is executed except during the special game (during the normal game state and the high probability time-saving game state), and is not executed during the special game (see Fig. 51 (a) to (h)).

(Summary of special game effects)
During a special game that is executed based on a big win, a special game performance is executed. In this special game performance, a special game image for livening up the special game being executed is displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 (see FIG. 51(c), (e) to (h)). During the special game, an image of the number of rounds suggesting the round game being executed is also displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 (see FIG. 51(c), (e) to (h)). By displaying this image of the number of rounds, it is possible to suggest to the player which round of round game is being executed.
In addition, during the special game performance, not only is a special game image displayed, but in conjunction with the display of the special game image, predetermined background music and sound are output from the audio output device 10 (speaker), and the performance lighting device 23 (lamp) emits light in a predetermined lighting pattern and color.

As mentioned above, after the special game ends, a high probability time-saving game state is always set, and during this high probability time-saving game state, a high probability time-saving state indication image (for example, a text image saying "SUPER TIME") that indicates that a high probability time-saving game state is in progress is displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 (see FIG. 51(d)).

(Overview of display of winning balls)
When a jackpot is won during normal gameplay and a special game based on the win is started, a display of the number of prize balls won, indicating the cumulative number of prize balls since the start of the game (i.e., the cumulative number of prize balls paid out and won by the player based on the entry of game balls into each winning port (general winning port 14, first start winning port 15, second start winning port 16, large winning port 18)) begins (for example, when the cumulative number of prize balls reaches 700, a text image of "700 pt" or the like is displayed (see Figures 51 (c) to (h))).
The display of the number of winning balls is updated every time a game ball enters each winning port. That is, it is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out based on the ball entering. Note that, instead of updating the value by adding the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out every time a game ball enters each winning port, it may be updated to a value obtained by adding the number of prize balls actually paid out based on the game ball entering each winning port.
The display of the number of winning balls continues during the high-probability time-saving game state that is set after the special game ends, and during the special game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in the high-probability time-saving game state, and ends when the high-probability time-saving game state ends because the number of times the special pattern changes reaches the high probability number without winning a jackpot.
In other words, when a special game based on winning a jackpot during the normal game state is started, the number of winning balls is continuously displayed while the setting of the high probability time-saving game state and the execution of the special game based on winning a jackpot during the high probability time-saving game state are being repeated.

Here, when the setting of the high probability time-saving game state and the execution of the special game based on winning a jackpot during the high probability time-saving game state are repeated, the number of prize balls won and displayed will gradually increase. However, in the pachinko machine P of this form, when the number of prize balls won reaches a number equivalent to the difference in the number of balls at which the game will stop (i.e., 95,000 balls, which is the operation stop number), the number of prize balls won is not displayed, and instead of the number of prize balls won, a difference in balls reached display (for example, a difference in balls reached image saying "COMPLETE!" is displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 to indicate that the number equivalent to the difference in the number of balls has been reached) (see Figures 51 (f) to (h)).
In other words, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, even if the number of winning prize balls reaches a number equivalent to the difference in the number of balls at which the game will stop, the number equivalent to that difference in the number of balls is not displayed as the number of winning prize balls.
Although the number of winning balls is displayed during special play and high probability time-saving play, if the player or hall staff who sees this recognizes it as the difference in the number of winning balls, if the number equivalent to the difference in the number of winning balls at which the game will stop (95,000 balls, which is the number of balls that will stop the game) is displayed as the number of winning balls, it may give the player the misunderstanding that the game stop based on the setting of the activation state is not functioning properly. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, even if the number of winning balls reaches the number equivalent to the difference in the number of balls at which the game will stop, the number equivalent to the difference in the number of winning balls is not displayed as the number of winning balls. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned misunderstanding from occurring.

Even if the number of winning balls reaches a number equivalent to the difference in the number of balls at which the game will stop, the control that prevents the number equivalent to that difference in the number of winning balls from being displayed as the number of winning balls is not limited to the above-mentioned difference in the number of balls reached display (display of a difference in the number of balls reached image).
For example, the number of winning balls may be displayed up to one less than the number corresponding to the difference in the number of winning balls at which the game will stop (94,999 balls), but the update of the number of winning balls may be stopped (i.e., the counting may be stopped) after the number of winning balls is displayed. Also, the difference in the number of winning balls image may be an image in which a specified character is displayed, instead of an image in which text information is displayed as described above.

The effects and displays performed during the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, and the special game state are not limited to the above. For example, during the normal game state or the high probability time-saving game state, a reserved number display may be performed to display the reserved number of the first special chart and the reserved number of the second special chart numerically, or a special image suggestion may be performed to suggest the result of the jackpot lottery using a special image different from the effect pattern 50. Also, during the high probability time-saving game state or the special game state, a right hit suggestion image may be displayed to suggest that the game ball will be shot toward the second game area 12b (so-called right hit).

(Summary of suggestions regarding differential ball operation stop control)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value and the activation warning state is set, until the end condition is met, that is, the power is cut off, the activation warning state ends, or a predetermined time (60 seconds) has passed, an activation warning indication (display of an activation warning text image) and an indication that the activation warning state has been set is given by turning on or off various lamps. Also, an activation warning sound is output from the time the activation warning state is set until the activation warning sound output time (5 seconds) has passed.
When an activation warning state is set during a special game, an activation warning text image is displayed together with the special game image, and when an activation warning state is set other than during a special game, an activation warning text image is displayed together with the performance pattern 50 and the reserved image 52. This activation warning text image is displayed in a small size in the upper center of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 so as not to interfere with the visibility of the special game image, the performance pattern 50, and the reserved image 52 (see Figs. 51(e) to (g)).

As described above, when the ball difference count value reaches the second reference value and the activation notice state is set because a special game was being executed at the time of the reaching, an activation notice suggestion (display of an activation notice text image) and an indication that the activation notice state has been set by turning on or off various lamps are performed until a power outage occurs or a termination condition is met that the activation notice state ends. Also, an activation notice sound is output from the time the activation notice state is set until the activation notice sound output time (7 seconds) has elapsed.
Since the activation notice state is set during a special game, an activation notice text image is displayed together with the special game image. Also, like the activation warning text image, this activation notice text image is displayed in a small size at the top center of the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21 so as not to interfere with the visibility of the special game image (see FIG. 51(h)).

Furthermore, as described above, when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value and an activation state is set because a special game was not being executed when the difference ball count value reached the second reference value, or because a special game that was being executed when the difference ball count value reached the second reference value has ended, an activation indication is given (display of an activation text image), an activation sound is output, and various lamps are turned on or off to indicate that the activation state has been set, until a power outage occurs.
After the special game ends, normally, the display will show the change in the performance pattern 50, the reserved image 52, an image indicating a high probability time-saving state, and the number of winning balls won (see Figure 51 (d)). However, when the special game ends and the activation state is set, these displays will not be made and instead an activation text image will be displayed.
Also, even in non-special games (high probability time-saving game state, normal game state), normally, the display of the change of the performance pattern 50, the display of the reserved image 52, the display of the high probability time-saving state suggestion image (only in the high probability time-saving game state), the display of the number of winning balls (only in the high probability time-saving game state), etc. are performed, but when the activation state is set in a state other than the special game, all of these displays are cleared and the activation character image is displayed. For example, even if the display of the change of the performance pattern 50 is being performed in conjunction with the display of the change of the special pattern, the display of the change of the performance pattern 50 is forcibly ended and the display of the change is cleared.
In this way, when the activation state is set, the performance pattern 50, reserved image 52, number of winning balls, etc. are cleared, so that there is no situation that interferes with the visibility of these, and therefore the activation text image is displayed on the entire surface of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 in a size larger than the activation warning text image and the activation notice text image (see Figure 51 (i)).

(Outline of control regarding change of speaker volume during game play possible state)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when in a playable state, during the period in which the current speaker volume can be changed, as described below, the up key or down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, so that the current speaker volume (the volume of the audio output device 10 being set) can be changed within a settable range.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the speaker volume can be set within a range of eight levels from "0" to "7"("0" being the minimum volume and "7" being the maximum volume), but the range that can be set by operating the cross key 25 is preset to five levels from "3" to "7." Also, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the initial value of the speaker volume that is set when power is restored can be set to any one of "3" to "7" by a predetermined switch connected to the sub-control board 300.
The range of the speaker volume that can be set is not limited to eight levels from "0" to "7", but may be set to more or fewer levels. The settable range is also not limited to five levels from "3" to "7", but may be set appropriately within the range of the speaker volume that can be set.

When the pressing of the up key of the cross key 25 is detected during the period in which the current speaker volume can be changed, the sub-CPU 301 changes the current speaker volume within the above-mentioned settable range. For example, if the current speaker volume is "3", the current speaker volume increases by one step each time the up key is pressed until it becomes "7", but the current speaker volume does not decrease any further even if the down key is pressed. Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "7", the current speaker volume decreases by one step each time the down key is pressed until it becomes "3", but the current speaker volume does not increase any further even if the up key is pressed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 53, when the up key or down key is pressed, a volume setting image AG indicating the current speaker volume setting state is displayed in the center of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21.
As shown in FIG. 53, the volume setting image AG includes five gauge images that gradually become longer from bottom to top, and each gauge image indicates a speaker volume within a changeable range. Specifically, the shortest gauge image located at the bottom indicates a speaker volume of "3", and the longest gauge image located at the top indicates a speaker volume of "7". The three gauge images located between them indicate speaker volumes of "4", "5", and "6", respectively, from bottom to top. The gauge image at the bottom to the horizontal gauge image indicating the current speaker volume are displayed in a predetermined color, and the remaining horizontal gauge images are displayed in a different color, so that the player can visually recognize the current speaker volume. For example, when the up key is pressed when the current speaker volume is "5", the current speaker volume becomes "6", so that the four horizontal gauge images from the bottom are displayed in a predetermined color, and only the horizontal gauge image at the top is displayed in a different color (see FIG. 53).

Although not specifically shown, if the speaker volume is changed and no game balls enter any of the start winning slots, and if the speaker volume is not changed thereafter, and a predetermined display switching time (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the volume setting image AG displayed in the center of the display unit 21a is erased.

In addition, data such as the settable range of the speaker volume, the initial value of the speaker volume, and the current speaker volume are stored in the sub-RAM 303 of the sub-control board 300. Then, based on the various data stored in the sub-RAM 303, the sub-CPU 301 performs various processes such as changing the current speaker volume. For example, when the cross key 25 is pressed, the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated, and the speaker volume after the pressing operation is stored in the sub-RAM 303 as the current speaker volume.

(Outline of control of sound and other output during playable state)
Next, the control of audio and other output during the playable state will be specifically explained for each of the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation preview state, and activation state, along with details of the control of changes to the channel adjustment value and speaker volume.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the decoder of the sound control board has a predetermined number of channels (a total of 40 channels from channel 1 to channel 40) for outputting sounds, etc., and each type of sound, etc. output in each performance is associated with a channel to be used for outputting that sound, etc.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the error indication sound output based on the occurrence of various errors is associated with channel 1. Also, the activation warning sound output in the activation warning state, the activation notice sound output in the activation notice state, and the activation sound output in the activation state (hereinafter, the activation warning sound, the activation notice sound, and the activation sound are collectively referred to as the difference ball stop control sound) are associated with channel 2. Also, the BGM and various sounds (hereinafter, also referred to as the effect sound) output in the variable effect and the special game effect are associated with any of channels 3 to 40.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, there may be cases where multiple events that cause errors occur at the same time, and in this case, multiple errors occur at the same time. Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a priority order is set in advance for the execution of error suggestions, and when multiple errors occur at the same time, a suggestion is made for the error with the highest predetermined priority among the multiple errors that have occurred, and suggestions for other errors are not made. Also, for example, when the suggestion for the error with the highest priority is completed, if another error has occurred, a suggestion for the other error will be made.
In this way, when multiple errors occur at the same time, only one of the errors is suggested according to a predetermined priority order, and multiple errors are not suggested at the same time. Therefore, all error suggestion sounds are associated with only one channel (channel 1), and each error suggestion sound is output separately using only this channel.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the activation warning sound is not output unless the activation warning state is set, the activation notice sound is not output unless the activation notice state is set, and the activation sound is not output unless the activation state is set. In other words, the activation warning sound, activation notice sound, and activation sound are not output simultaneously and overlapping. Therefore, the activation warning sound, activation notice sound, and activation sound are all associated with only one channel (channel 2), and the activation warning sound, activation notice sound, and activation sound are each output separately using only this channel.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage, the initial channel adjustment value for each channel is set to "2", and in this state, the sound corresponding to each channel is output at the current speaker volume. The data on the current channel adjustment value set for each channel is stored in the sound RAM of the sound control board.

(1) Pre-activation warning state In the pre-activation warning state, it is possible to execute the variable performance that is performed with the variable display of the special symbol and the special game performance that is performed during the special game. Also, as described above, in the pre-activation warning state, the occurrence of a door opening error, a main control related error, and a payout related error is judged, and when these errors occur, an error indication sound corresponding to the occurred error is output.

In addition, in the pre-activation warning state, the current speaker volume can be changed during the period from when the variable display of the special symbols starts to when it ends (the special symbols are stopped by the stopping of the variable display), during the standby state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not being performed, and during the period from when the special game starts to when it ends, but the current speaker volume cannot be changed during the period from when the special symbols are stopped to when the stopped display time has elapsed (hereinafter also referred to as the symbol determination period). Also, the current speaker volume can be changed during the occurrence of an error.
Specifically, when the up key or down key is pressed during the period when the current speaker volume can be changed, the volume setting image AG is displayed. When the up key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be increased within the above-mentioned settable range by the pressing operation, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to the speaker volume based on the pressing operation of the up key, thereby increasing the current speaker volume. When the down key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be decreased within the above-mentioned settable range by the pressing operation, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to the speaker volume based on the pressing operation of the down key, thereby decreasing the current speaker volume.

When no error occurs, the channel adjustment values of all channels corresponding to the sound effects (hereinafter also referred to as sound effect channels) remain at the initial value of "2", but when an error occurs, all of the channel adjustment values are changed to "0." In contrast, in the pre-warning state, the channel adjustment value of channel 1 corresponding to the error indication sound always remains at the initial value of "2."
As a result, in the pre-activation warning state, when a variable performance or a special game performance is being executed and no error has occurred, only the performance sound is output, but this performance sound is output at the current speaker volume. On the other hand, when a variable performance or a special game performance is being executed and an error has occurred, the performance sound and an error indication sound corresponding to the occurring error are output simultaneously, but the performance sound is output silently and the error indication sound is output at the current speaker volume.

Specifically, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when no error occurs, the sound effect is output at the current speaker volume of "5", and when an error occurs, the sound effect is output silently, but the error indication sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Also, for example, assume that the special symbol is being displayed variably or a special game is being played, no error has occurred, and the effect sound is being output at the current speaker volume of "5." At this time, when the up key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "6," thereby changing the current speaker volume to "6." As a result, the effect sound being output is output at the new current speaker volume of "6."
Also, for example, assume that a special symbol is being displayed variably or a special game is being played, an error has occurred, the sound effects are being output silently, and the error indication sound corresponding to the error has been output at the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "4", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "4". As a result, the error indication sound is output at the changed current speaker volume of "4", but the sound effects continue to be output silently.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when no error occurs in the pre-warning state, the sound effect can be heard at the current speaker volume, whereas when an error occurs, the sound effect cannot be heard and the error indication sound can be heard at the current speaker volume. This allows the error indication sound to be recognized reliably when an error occurs, and the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred to be reliably understood by the error indication sound.

In addition, in the pre-warning state, the volume of the current speaker may be made unchangeable while an error is occurring. This prevents a situation in which the volume of the current speaker is reduced by pressing the down key while an error is occurring, making it difficult to recognize the error indication sound and therefore difficult to grasp the occurrence of an error and the type of the error that has occurred.
Also, when an error occurs, the error indication volume may be output at the maximum speaker volume (i.e., "7") regardless of the current speaker volume. In this way, when an error occurs, the error indication sound can be more reliably recognized, and the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred can be more reliably understood.
Also, when an error occurs, the output of the sound effect may be stopped rather than outputting the sound effect silently. Even in this case, the error indication sound can be recognized reliably when an error occurs, and the occurrence of an error and the type of the error that has occurred can be reliably understood by the error indication sound.
Also, when an error occurs, a special sound may be output that is audible but at a lower volume than the error indication sound.

(2) Activation warning state In the activation warning state, similarly to the pre-activation warning state, it is possible to execute the variable effects that accompany the changing display of special patterns and the special play effects that are performed during special play, and the occurrence of door opening errors, main control related errors, and payout related errors is determined. If any of these errors occurs, an error indication sound corresponding to the occurred error is output.
In addition, the activation warning sound is output from the time the activation warning state is set until the activation warning sound output time (5 seconds) has elapsed.

In the activation warning state, similarly to the pre-activation warning state, the current speaker volume can be changed during the period from when the variable display of the special symbols starts to when it ends, during the standby state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and during the period from when the special game starts to when it ends, but the current speaker volume cannot be changed during the symbol determination period. Also, the current speaker volume can be changed during the occurrence of an error.
The process of changing the current speaker volume in the activated warning state is similar to that in the pre-activated warning state, and therefore will not be described here.

When an activation warning sound is being output and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 corresponding to the difference ball stop control sound remains at the initial value of "2", but the channel adjustment values of the performance sound channels are all changed to "1". When an activation warning sound is being output and an error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the performance sound channel are all changed to "0".
Furthermore, when the activation warning sound is not being output (i.e., after the output of the activation warning sound has ended) and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the effect sound channel both remain at the initial value of "2." Also, when the activation warning sound is not being output and an error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the effect sound channel both are changed to "0."
In contrast, as in the pre-warning state, in the activated warning state, the channel adjustment value for channel 1 corresponding to the error indication sound remains at the initial value of "2".

As a result, when a variable performance or a special game performance is being executed while the activation warning sound is being output and no error has occurred, the activation warning sound and the performance sound are output simultaneously, and although the activation warning sound is output at the current speaker volume, the performance sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume.
In addition, when a variable effect or a special game effect is being executed while the activation warning sound is being output, and an error occurs, the activation warning sound, the effect sound, and the error indication sound corresponding to the occurring error are output simultaneously, but the effect sound and the activation warning sound are output silently, and the error indication sound is output at the current speaker volume.
Also, when the activation warning sound is not being output, a variable performance or a special game performance is being executed and no error has occurred, only the performance sound is output, but this performance sound is output at the current speaker volume as it is.
In addition, when the activation warning sound is not being output, a variable performance or a special game performance is being executed and an error has occurred, the performance sound and the error indication sound corresponding to the occurring error are output simultaneously, but the performance sound is output silently and the error indication sound is output at the current speaker volume.

Specifically, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5," while the activation warning sound is being output and no error has occurred, the activation warning sound is output at the current speaker volume of "5," but the effect sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume of "5." In other words, at this time, the effect sound is output at a volume lower than the activation warning sound.
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when an activation warning sound is being output and an error occurs, both the activation warning sound and the sound effect are output silently, but the error indication sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when the activation warning sound is not being output and no error has occurred, the effect sound is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when the activation warning sound is not being output and an error has occurred, the sound effect is output silently, but the error indication sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".

Also, for example, assume that during output of the activation warning sound, the special symbol is being displayed variably or a special game is being played, no error has occurred, and the activation warning sound is being output at the current speaker volume of "5" and the performance sound is being output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the up key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "6", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "6". As a result, the activation warning sound is output at the changed current speaker volume of "6", and the performance sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the changed current speaker volume of "6".
Also, for example, suppose that during output of the activation warning sound, the variable display of a special symbol or execution of a special game, an error has occurred, the activation warning sound and the sound effects are output silently, and the error indication sound corresponding to the error has been output at the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "4", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "4". As a result, the error indication sound described above is output at the changed current speaker volume of "4", but the activation warning sound and the sound effects continue to be output silently.
Also, for example, when the activation warning sound is not being output, the special symbol is being displayed variably or a special game is being played, no error has occurred, and the effect sound is being output at the current speaker volume of "3." At this time, when the up key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "4," thereby changing the current speaker volume to "4." As a result, the effect sound is output at the new current speaker volume of "4."
Also, for example, when the activation warning sound is not being output, the special symbol is being displayed variably or a special game is being played, an error has occurred, the sound effects are output silently, and the error indication sound corresponding to the error has been output at the current speaker volume of "7". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "6", thereby changing the current speaker volume to "6". As a result, the error indication sound is output at the changed current speaker volume of "6", but the sound effects continue to be output silently.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the activation warning sound is being output in the activation warning state and no error has occurred, both the activation warning sound and the effect sound are output, but the volume of the effect sound is smaller than the activation warning sound. This makes it easier to hear the activation warning sound than the effect sound, so that even during the execution of the variable effect or the special play effect, it is easy to understand that the activation warning state has been set by the activation warning sound.
Furthermore, regardless of whether the activation warning sound is being output, when an error occurs, the activation warning sound and the sound effect become inaudible, and the error indication sound becomes audible at the current speaker volume. This allows the error indication sound to be recognized reliably when an error occurs, and the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred to be reliably understood by the error indication sound.

In addition, in the activation warning state, the volume of the current speaker may be made unchangeable while the activation warning sound is being output. This prevents a situation in which the volume of the current speaker is reduced by pressing the down key while the activation warning sound is being output, making it difficult to hear the activation warning sound and therefore difficult to understand that the activation warning state has been set.
In addition, during output of the activation warning sound, the activation warning sound may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. This makes the activation warning sound easier to hear, and makes it easier to understand that the activation warning state has been set.
In addition, while the activation warning sound is being output, it is sufficient that the activation warning sound is easier to hear than the effect sound, and the volume of the effect sound is not limited to 25% of the current speaker volume. For example, the effect sound may be output silently. Also, the output of the effect sound itself may be stopped. Even in this case, it is easy to understand that the activation warning state has been set by the activation warning sound during the execution of the variable effect or the special game effect.
Also, in the activation warning state, similarly to the pre-warning state, the current speaker volume may not be changed while an error is occurring. Also, during the occurrence of an error, the error indication volume may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. Also, during the occurrence of an error, the output of the sound effect may be stopped rather than outputting the sound effect silently.

(3) Activation Pre-notification State In the activation pre-notification state, a special in-play performance is executed, and the occurrence of a door opening error, a main control related error, or a payout related error is determined. If any of these errors occurs, an error indication sound corresponding to the occurred error is output.
In addition, the activation notice sound will be output from the time the activation notice state is set until the activation notice sound output time (7 seconds) has elapsed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the special game being executed when the activation notice state is set ends, the activation notice state ends. Therefore, in the activation notice state, the current speaker volume can be changed during the period until the special game being executed ends. Also, like the pre-activation warning state and the activation warning state, the current speaker volume can be changed even during the occurrence of an error.
The process of changing the current speaker volume in the activated warning state is similar to that in the pre-activated warning state and the activated warning state, and therefore will not be described here.

When the activation warning sound is being output and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 corresponding to the difference ball stop control sound remains at the initial value of "2", but the channel adjustment values of the effect sound channels are all changed to "1". When the activation warning sound is being output and an error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the effect sound channel are all changed to "0".
Furthermore, when the activation warning sound is not being output (i.e., after the output of the activation warning sound has ended) and no error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the sound effect channel both remain at the initial value of "2." Also, when the activation warning sound is not being output and an error has occurred, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 and the channel adjustment value of the sound effect channel both are changed to "0."
In contrast, in the activation preview state, like the pre-activation warning state and the activation warning state, the channel adjustment value of channel 1 corresponding to the error indication sound always remains at "2", which is set as the initial value.

As a result, when the activation notice sound is being output and no error has occurred, the activation notice sound and the effect sound (the effect sound during special play) are output simultaneously, and although the activation notice sound is output at the current speaker volume, the effect sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume.
In addition, when an activation warning sound is being output and an error occurs, the activation warning sound, a sound effect, and an error indication sound corresponding to the occurring error are output simultaneously, but the sound effect and activation warning sound are output silently, and the error indication sound is output at the current speaker volume.
Also, when the activation advance warning sound is not being output and no error has occurred, only the effect sound is output, but this effect sound is output at the current speaker volume as is.
Also, when the activation advance warning sound is not output and an error occurs, a sound effect and an error indication sound corresponding to the occurring error are output simultaneously, but the sound effect is output silently and the error indication sound is output at the current speaker volume.

Specifically, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5," while the activation notice sound is being output and no error has occurred, the activation notice sound is output at the current speaker volume of "5," but the effect sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume of "5." In other words, at this time, the effect sound is output at a volume lower than the activation notice sound.
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when the activation warning sound is being output and an error occurs, both the activation warning sound and the sound effect are output silently, but the error indication sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when the activation warning sound is not being output and no error has occurred, the effect sound is output at the current speaker volume of "5".
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when the activation warning sound is not being output and an error has occurred, the sound effect is output silently, but the error indication sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5".

Also, for example, assume that no error occurs during output of the activation warning sound, the activation warning sound is output at a current speaker volume of "5", and the effect sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the up key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "6", and the current speaker volume is changed to "6". As a result, the activation warning sound is output at the changed current speaker volume of "6", and the effect sound is output at a volume that is 25% of the changed current speaker volume of "6".
Also, for example, suppose that an error occurs during output of an activation warning sound, the activation warning sound and the sound effects are output silently, and the error indication sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "5". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "4", and the current speaker volume is changed to "4". As a result, the error indication sound is output at the changed current speaker volume of "4", but the activation warning sound and the sound effects continue to be output silently.
Also, for example, when the activation warning sound is not being output, no error has occurred, and the effect sound is being output at the current speaker volume of "3." At this time, when the up key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "4," thereby changing the current speaker volume to "4." As a result, the effect sound is output at the new current speaker volume of "4."
Also, for example, when the activation warning sound is not being output, an error has occurred, the sound effects are output silently, and the error indication sound corresponding to the error is output at the current speaker volume of "7". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "6", and the current speaker volume is changed to "6". As a result, the error indication sound is output at the changed current speaker volume of "6", but the sound effects continue to be output silently.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the activation notice sound is being output in the activation notice state and no error occurs, both the activation notice sound and the performance sound are output, but the volume of the performance sound is smaller than the activation notice sound. This makes it easier to hear the activation notice sound than the performance sound, so that even when the special play performance is being executed, it is easy to understand that the activation notice state has been set by the activation notice sound.
In addition, regardless of whether the activation warning sound is being output, when an error occurs, the activation warning sound and the sound effect become inaudible, and the error indication sound becomes audible at the current speaker volume. This allows the error indication sound to be recognized reliably when an error occurs, and the occurrence of an error and the type of error that has occurred to be reliably understood by the error indication sound.

In addition, in the activation notice state, the volume of the current speaker may be made unchangeable while the activation notice sound is being output. This prevents a situation in which the volume of the current speaker is reduced by pressing the down key while the activation notice sound is being output, making it difficult to hear the activation notice sound and making it difficult to understand that the activation notice state has been set.
In addition, during output of the activation notice sound, the activation notice sound may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. This makes the activation notice sound easier to hear, and makes it easier to understand that the activation notice state has been set.
In addition, while the activation notice sound is being output, it is sufficient that the activation notice sound is easier to hear than the effect sound, and the volume of the effect sound is not limited to 25% of the current speaker volume. For example, the effect sound may be output silently. Also, the output of the effect sound itself may be stopped. Even in this case, even if the special play effect is being executed, the activation notice sound makes it easy to understand that the activation notice state has been set.
Also, in the activation notice state, similarly to the pre-activation warning state and the activation warning state, the current speaker volume may not be changed while an error is occurring. Also, during the occurrence of an error, the error indication volume may be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. Also, during the occurrence of an error, the output of the effect sound itself may be stopped, rather than outputting the effect sound silently.

(4) Activation state In the activation state, the variable effect and the special game effect are not executed, so the effect sound is not output. In addition, only the occurrence of a door opening error is judged, and when the error occurs, an error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error is output.
Furthermore, once the activation state is set, the activation sound will be output until a power outage occurs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the current speaker volume can be changed at any time from when the activation state is set to when it ends. Also, like the pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, and activation notice state, the current speaker volume can be changed even during the occurrence of a door open error.
Here, during the activation state, the volume setting image AG is not displayed even if the up key or the down key is pressed. That is, during the activation state, the volume setting image AG is not displayed, and only the change of the current speaker volume is executed. Then, when the up key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be increased within the above-mentioned settable range by the pressing operation, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to the speaker volume based on the pressing operation of the up key, so that the current speaker volume is increased. Also, when the down key is pressed, if the current speaker volume can be decreased within the above-mentioned settable range by the pressing operation, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to the speaker volume based on the pressing operation of the down key, so that the current speaker volume is decreased.

When no door opening error occurs, the channel adjustment value of channel 2 corresponding to the difference ball stop control sound remains at the initial value of "2". As described above, since no effect sound is output during the activation state, all the channel adjustment values of the effect sound channels also remain at the initial value of "2". Note that the channel adjustment value of this effect sound channel may be changed to "0" instead of remaining at "2".
On the other hand, when a door opening error occurs, in the activated state, the channel adjustment value of channel 1 corresponding to the error indication sound always remains at "2", which is set as the initial value.

Here, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the activation sound is being output and a door opening error has not occurred, only the activation sound is output, but this activation sound is always output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume.
In addition, when the activation sound is being output and a door opening error occurs, the activation sound and the error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error are output simultaneously, but the activation sound is output silently and the error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error is always output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume.

Specifically, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", while the activation sound is being output and a door opening error has not occurred, the activation sound is output at a speaker volume of "7".
Also, for example, if the current speaker volume is "5", when the activation sound is being output and a door opening error occurs, the activation sound is output silently, but the error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error is output at a speaker volume of "7".
Also, for example, when the current speaker volume is "3", a door opening error has not occurred, and the activation sound is output at a speaker volume of "7". At this time, when the up key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "4". As a result, although the current speaker volume is changed to "4", the activation sound continues to be output at the speaker volume of "7".
Also, for example, suppose that the current speaker volume is "7", a door open error has occurred, and an error indication sound corresponding to the door open error has been output at a speaker volume of "7". At this time, when the down key of the cross key 25 is pressed, the data of the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is updated to "6". As a result, although the current speaker volume is changed to "6", the error indication sound corresponding to the door open error continues to be output at the speaker volume of "7".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the door opening error does not occur in the activation state, the activation sound is output, but this activation sound is always output at the maximum speaker volume of "7" regardless of the current speaker volume. This makes it possible to reliably hear the activation sound, and therefore makes it possible to reliably understand that the activation state has been set by this activation sound.
In addition, when a door opening error occurs, the activation sound cannot be heard, and the error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error is always output at the maximum speaker volume of "7" regardless of the current speaker volume. This allows the error indication sound to be reliably heard when a door opening error occurs, and the occurrence of a door opening error can be reliably grasped by the error indication sound.

In addition, in the activation state, regardless of whether a door open error occurs or not, the current speaker volume may be always prevented from being changed. In this way, the processing load of the sub-CPU 301 and the like in the activation state can be reduced.
In addition, the activation sound does not necessarily need to be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7") as long as it can be reliably heard. For example, it may be output at a speaker volume one level lower than the maximum speaker volume ("6").
In addition, the error indication sound corresponding to the door opening error does not necessarily have to be output at the maximum speaker volume ("7"). For example, it may be output at a speaker volume one level lower than the maximum speaker volume ("6"), or may be output at the current speaker volume.
In addition, when a door opening error occurs, rather than outputting the activation sound silently, the output of the activation sound itself may be stopped.

(Outline of position correction process for displacing the role object performance device YS to the initial position)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, during the reach development performance in the variable performance, the role performance device YS is displaced to a movable position to perform the role rotation performance, and when this role rotation performance ends, the role performance device YS is displaced from the movable position to the initial position. At this time, for example, if the role performance device YS is caught on a structure on the game board 11, the role performance device YS cannot displace to the initial position and may stop at the movable position or just before the initial position. If the role performance device YS stops at the movable position, etc., the role performance device YS may overlap the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, which may deteriorate the visibility of various displays and various suggestions performed on the display unit 21a. In addition, since the role performance device YS stops at a position different from the normal state, it may be misconstrued by the player as suggesting something about the lottery result of the big win.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, if the reel performance device YS is not located in the initial position at the start of the variable performance (at the start of the variable display of the special pattern), a position correction process (hereinafter also referred to as the variable start position correction process) is executed to displace the reel performance device YS to the initial position.

In this movement start position correction process, first, when the sub-CPU 301 receives a movement mode command and a movement pattern command from the main control board 100, it determines whether or not the role-playing device YS is located at the initial position.
Although not shown in particular, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment is provided with an initial position detection sensor for detecting the reel performance device YS located at the initial position. When detection is being performed by this initial position detection sensor, a predetermined detection signal is input to the sub-control board 300. If the detection signal is input, the sub-CPU 301 determines that the reel performance device YS is located at the initial position, and if the detection signal is not input, it determines that the reel performance device YS is not located at the initial position.
If the sub-CPU 301 determines that the reel performance device YS is not located at the initial position, it controls the drive motor M to displace the reel performance device YS to the initial position, and after a predetermined confirmation time (300 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed, it executes an initial process to determine again whether the reel performance device YS is located at the initial position.
In this initial process, if it is determined that the reel performance device YS is located at the initial position, it means that the reel performance device YS has been displaced to the initial position. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel performance device YS is not located at the initial position, it means that the reel performance device YS has not yet been displaced to the initial position.
If it is determined that the role-playing device YS is not located at the initial position, the sub-CPU 301 executes a retry process with the same contents as the initial process described above. This retry process is repeated a maximum of a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the role-playing device YS is not located at the initial position even after the retry process is executed a predetermined number of times, the sub-CPU 301 determines that a malfunction has occurred regarding the displacement of the role-playing device YS. If it is determined that a malfunction has occurred regarding the displacement of the role-playing device YS, the position correction process at the start of the fluctuation for this role-playing device YS is not executed at the start of the subsequent fluctuation performance until a power interruption occurs.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the activation state is set, the variable performance being executed is forcibly terminated. Therefore, when the activation state is set while the reel rotation performance is being executed by the reel performance device YS, the reel rotation performance being executed is also forcibly terminated.
Then, when this activation state is set, if the reel performance device YS is not located in the initial position, a position correction process (hereinafter also referred to as position correction process when the activation state is set) is executed to displace the reel performance device YS to its initial position, similar to when the variable performance starts.
Furthermore, in this position correction process when the activation state is set, as described above, even if it is determined that a malfunction has occurred regarding the displacement of the reel performance device YS, a process is executed to displace the reel performance device YS to its initial position.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if the reel rotation performance by the reel performance device YS is being executed when the activation state is set, the reel rotation performance is forcibly terminated. Also, when the activation state is set, a position correction process is executed to displace the reel performance device YS to the initial position.
This makes it possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the reel production device YS overlaps with the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, and the visibility of the activation suggestion displayed on the display unit 21a during the activation state becomes poor. Also, it is possible to prevent a misconception that the game is progressing even though the activation state is set, due to the performance by the reel production device YS being executed or the reel production device YS not being located at the initial position.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, only one role performance device is provided for use in various performances, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more role performance devices that can be displaced within different ranges or can be operated in different modes may be provided. Even when two or more role performance devices are provided, the same position correction process at the start of fluctuation, the position correction process at the time of setting the activation state, etc. as described above may be performed for these role performance devices.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as a prerequisite for executing the position correction process, it is determined whether or not the bonus performance device YS is located at the initial position, but this is not limited to this. For example, the position correction process may be executed without determining whether or not the bonus performance device YS is located at the initial position.
Furthermore, the timing for executing the position correction process is not limited to the start of the variable presentation or when the activation state is set, but may be executed, for example, at the end of the variable presentation or the end of a special game.

(Outline of processing during standby state)
In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, when the special pattern is not displayed in a variable manner during the pre-activation warning state or during the activation warning state in a playable state, and neither the first special pattern random number nor the second special pattern random number is stored, the machine remains in a standby state in which no game is being played.
Specifically, during the pre-activation warning state or activation warning state, when the variable display of the special symbol stops and the above-mentioned symbol determination time has elapsed, the standby state is started when neither the first nor second special symbol random number is stored. As described above, when the standby state is started, the main CPU 101 transmits a standby state start command to the sub-control board 300 indicating that the standby state has started. This allows the sub-control board 300 to grasp the start of the standby state. Then, when the first or second special symbol random number is acquired and the variable display of the special symbol starts, the standby state ends.

Then, when the sub-CPU 301 receives the standby state start command (when the standby state starts), the sub-control board 300 starts measuring the no-operation time, which is the time during which no operation is performed by the player.
This no-operation time is measured by a no-operation time timer counter, which is an addition timer (count-up timer) provided on the sub-control board 300. After the measurement of the no-operation time is started, the measurement continues until the standby state ends, and the count value of the no-operation time timer counter is reset when the operation handle 5 is rotated, the operation button 9b is pressed, or the cross key 25 is pressed.
Specifically, when a standby state start command is received and measurement of the no-operation time is started, the no-operation time timer counter counts up from 0 seconds → 1 second → 2 seconds → ..., and every time a rotation operation of the operating handle 5, a press operation of the operating button 9b, or a press operation of the cross key 25 is detected, the no-operation time timer counter restarts counting up from 0 seconds. Then, when the standby state ends, the no-operation time timer counter also stops counting up.
Note that, although measurement of the no-operation time starts when the standby state starts, the count value of the no-operation time timer counter continues to be reset if, for example, the operation of rotating the operating handle 5 continues at this point. Therefore, in effect, when the standby state start command is received, measurement of the no-operation time starts on the condition that the operation of rotating the operating handle 5, the operation of pressing the operating button 9b, and the operation of pressing the cross key 25 are not being performed.

Then, when the no-operation time reaches a predetermined demo start time (30 seconds in this embodiment) (i.e., when the count value of the no-operation time timer counter reaches the demo start time value), the sub-CPU 301 executes a process to perform a predetermined demo display (for example, displaying a demo image expressing a story related to the motif of the pachinko machine P) on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21. Note that even after the demo display starts, the measurement of the no-operation time continues. Then, regardless of the measured no-operation time, when a predetermined demo display time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed or the standby state ends, a process to end the demo display is executed.

Then, when the demo display time has elapsed and the demo display has ended, a process is performed to transition to a power-saving state in order to suppress power consumption during standby. Although not shown in the figure, in the power-saving state, various lamps are turned off, the brightness of the performance display device 21 is reduced, and output of sound and the like is stopped, and a display is displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 to indicate that the device is in a power-saving state. This suppresses power consumption.
In addition, the power saving state is terminated when a command sent from the main control board 100 as the game progresses (for example, a start winning command based on the game ball entering the first start winning port 15 or the second start winning port 16, a variation mode command or a variation pattern command based on the start of variation of a special pattern, etc.) is received by the sub-control board 300, or when the operating handle 5 is rotated, the operating button 9b is pressed, or the cross key 25 is pressed.

(Outline of the process when an activation state is set during standby)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the machine remains in the standby state that was started during the activation warning state, for example, a game ball that was shot before the start of the standby state or a game ball that was continuously shot after the start of the standby state may enter the general winning port 14, causing the difference ball count value to reach the second reference value (195,000) while remaining in the standby state. In this case, the activation warning state ends while remaining in the standby state, and the activation state is set.
Furthermore, even if the activation state is set while in standby state, the above-mentioned activation suggestion (display of an activation text image) is made on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21.

Here, as described above, when the standby state starts, the measurement of the no-operation time by the no-operation time timer counter starts, but in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, even if the activation state is set while staying in the standby state, the measurement of the no-operation time is continued. As a result, the no-operation time being measured during this activation state may reach the above-mentioned demo start time. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, even if the no-operation time being measured during the activation state reaches the demo start time, the above-mentioned demo display process is executed. When this process is executed, the display of the demo image is executed internally, and a situation occurs in which the display of the activation character image (activation suggestion) based on the activation state setting and the display of the demo image are both executed in an overlapping manner on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the priority order of execution is predefined for the display of the activation character image and the display of the demo image, and the display of the activation character image has a higher priority than the display of the demo image. Therefore, internally, the display of the activation character image and the display of the demo image are in a state where they are overlappingly executed, but the display of the demo image is restricted, and the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 does not display the demo image, but only the activation character image. In other words, even if the no-operation time reaches the demo start time during the activation state and the process of displaying the demo is executed, the display of the activation character image continues, so the appearance on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 does not change, and it is not possible to grasp from the display of the display unit 21a that the demo display is being executed internally.

Furthermore, when a process for performing a demo display is executed during an activation state, as described above, the demo image display is being executed internally, and therefore the above-mentioned lapse of the demo display time is also determined. Then, when the demo display time has elapsed, a process for terminating the demo display is executed, the state in which the demo image display is being executed internally ends, and even during the activation state, a process for transitioning to a power-saving state is executed. When this process is executed, the device remains in a power-saving state internally, and a situation occurs in which the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 displays both the activation character image and a display indicating that the device is in a power-saving state at the same time.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the priority order of execution is also determined in advance for the display of the activation character image and the display of the power saving state, and the display of the activation character image has a higher priority than the display of the power saving state. Therefore, internally, the display of the activation character image and the display of the power saving state are overlappingly executed, but the display of the power saving state is restricted, and the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 does not display the power saving state, and only the activation character image is displayed. In other words, even if the demo display ends during the activation state and the process of transitioning to the power saving state is executed, the display of the activation character image continues, so the appearance on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21 does not change, and it is not possible to grasp from the display of the display unit 21a that the device is internally in the power saving state.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, processing is performed to transition to a power saving state while in an activated state, and when the machine is internally in a power saving state, processing such as turning off various lamps, reducing the brightness of the performance display device 21, and stopping the output of sound, etc. is not executed (is restricted).
Therefore, in this case, various lamps will be lit in the same manner as before the process of transitioning to the above-mentioned power saving state was performed, the brightness of the performance display device 21 will not change, and the output of sound, etc. will continue.

As mentioned above, the power saving state is ended when commands (start winning command, variation mode command, variation pattern command, etc.) sent from the main control board 100 as the game progresses are received by the sub-control board 300, or when the operating handle 5 is rotated, the operating button 9b is pressed, or the cross key 25 is pressed.
Here, in the activated state, the game does not progress and the game ball is not launched, so that the commands accompanying the progress of the game described above are not transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300. On the other hand, even in the activated state, the sub-control board 300 can grasp the rotation operation of the operating handle 5, the pressing operation of the operating button 9b, and the pressing operation of the cross key 25.
Therefore, the power saving state entered during the activation state (the power saving state in which the power saving state remains internally) is not terminated by the sub-control board 300 receiving a command sent from the main control board 100 as the game progresses, but is terminated by rotating the operating handle 5, pressing the operating button 9b, or pressing the cross key 25.
Even after this power-saving state ends, the activation text image continues to be displayed, so that the appearance does not change on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, and it is not possible to know from the display on the display unit 21a that the internal power-saving state has ended.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the activation state may be set by the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed in the activation warning state. In this case, the variable display of the special symbol being executed is forcibly ended and the game is stopped, so the standby state is not started and the main CPU 101 does not send a standby state start command to the sub-control board 300.
Similarly, even when the activation preview state ends and the activation state is set, the special game being played ends and the game stops, so the standby state does not start and the main CPU 101 does not send a standby state start command to the sub-control board 300.
Therefore, in these cases, the sub-control board 300 does not start measuring the no-operation time, and the demo display and transition to the power saving state are not performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, even if an activation state is set during a standby state, the measurement of the no-operation time, which begins based on the start of the standby state, continues to be executed.
This allows processing based on the non-operation time (demo display, transition to power saving state) to be executed even in an activation state set during standby. Also, since the control is the same as when the activation state is not set during standby, the control can be executed by a common program whether the activation state is set or not. In other words, since there is no need to provide different programs depending on whether the activation state is set or not, the storage capacity of the sub-ROM 302 can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the activation state is set during standby, a process for displaying a demo is executed when the non-operation time reaches the demo start time, but the display of the demo image is restricted and only the activation character image is displayed. Also, when the demo display time has elapsed, a process for transitioning to a power-saving state is executed, but the display indicating that the state is in the power-saving state is restricted and only the activation character image is displayed.
This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the activation indication from becoming poor in the activation state that is set during the standby state, and makes it possible to reliably recognize that the activation state has been set.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when an activation state is set during standby, the display of the demo display or the power saving state is restricted by displaying only the activation text image, without displaying a demo image or a notice that the device is in a power saving state; however, the manner of restriction is not limited to this. For example, the display may be made in a smaller range than when a demo image or a notice that the device is in a power saving state is displayed without the activation state being set during standby. Also, the display may be made for a shorter period of time than in this case.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the no-operation timer counter is reset and the power-saving state is terminated by rotating the operating handle 5, but this is not limited to rotation, and these processes may be executed by simply touching the operating handle 5. Specifically, the sub-control board 300 may be set up to know that the operating handle 5 has been touched by transmitting a detection by the touch sensor 5a (detection that the operating handle 5 has been touched) to the sub-control board 300, and when the sub-control board 300 detects that the operating handle 5 has been touched while the no-operation timer counter is being measured or while the power-saving state is in progress, the no-operation timer counter may be reset or the power-saving state may be terminated.

Next, the control process in the sub-control board 300 for executing the various processes described above will be described.
First, the main processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
In step 10000, in response to power-on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 302, and initialization and setting processes of flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 303 are executed.
In step 10001, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process of updating each effect random number (variable effect random number), and thereafter, repeats the process of step 10001 until an interrupt process is performed. Here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). When this reset clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse, the sub-CPU 301 reads a timer interrupt processing program and starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

In step 10100, the sub-CPU 301 executes an update process for various timer counters used in the sub-control board 300. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10101.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, a countdown timer is used as a timer counter other than the no-operation time timer counter, and the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300 is executed, and the countdown stops when it reaches 0.
In step 10101, the sub-CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 303, and executes various processes according to the received command. Specifically, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 100, the sub-control board 300 performs a command reception interrupt process, and the command transmitted from the main control board 100 is stored in the receive buffer. The sub-CPU 301 then analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer by the command reception interrupt process. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10102.

In step 10102, the sub-CPU 301 executes a standby state operation control process that is performed based on the pressing operation of the cross key 25 or the pressing operation of the operation button 9b in the standby state.
In step 10103, the sub CPU 301 executes a demo display control process which is a process related to the demo display.

In step 10104, the sub CPU 301 executes a power saving state control process which is a process related to the power saving state.
In step 10105, the sub CPU 301 executes a current speaker volume control process which is a process related to the current speaker volume.

In step 10106, the sub-CPU 301 executes a pre-warning volume adjustment process, which is a process related to volume adjustment in a pre-warning state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10107.
In step 10107, the sub-CPU 301 executes a volume adjustment process during activation warning/notice, which is a process related to volume adjustment in the activation warning state or activation notice state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10108.

In step 10108, the sub-CPU 301 executes an in-motion volume adjustment process, which is a process related to volume adjustment in the in-motion state. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10109.
In step 10109, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the operation of the performance operation device 9 is acceptable or not according to the progress of the variable performance being executed, and judges whether the operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. If the performance operation device 9 is accepting the operation when the operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the press operation detection sensor 9d, the command is stored in the transmission buffer to transmit the fact that the performance operation device 9 has been operated to various control boards such as an image control board (not shown), a sound control board (not shown), and an illumination control board (not shown). Then, proceed to the next step 10110.
In step 10110, the sub-CPU 301 transmits the commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 303 to various control boards such as the image control board, the audio control board, the illumination control board, etc. Then, the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300 is terminated.

Next, the standby state start command reception process executed when the standby state start command is received among the command analysis processes in step 10101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 56. The standby state start command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 811 of the special symbol variation start process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the process in step 212.
In step 10200, the sub CPU 301 starts measuring the no-operation time by the no-operation time timer counter. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10201.
In step 10201, the sub CPU 301 turns on a measurement in progress flag indicating that the no-operation time is being measured (i.e., the device is in a standby state), and then ends the standby state start command reception process.

Next, the start winning command reception process executed when the start winning command is received among the command analysis processes in step 10101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 57. The start winning command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 509 of the first start winning port detection process or step 609 of the second start winning port detection process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the process in step 212.
In step 10300, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the measurement flag is on or not. If it is judged that the measurement flag is not on (i.e., it is off), the start winning command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the measurement flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 10301.
In step 10301, the sub CPU 301 ends the measurement of the no-operation time by the no-operation time timer counter, and then proceeds to the next step 10302.

In step 10302, the sub CPU 301 turns off the measurement in progress flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10303.
In step 10303, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not a demonstration flag indicating that a demonstration display is being executed is on, i.e., whether or not a demonstration display is being executed. If it is judged that the demonstration flag is not on (i.e., it is off), the process proceeds to step 10306. On the other hand, if it is judged that the demonstration flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 10304.

In step 10304, the sub-CPU 301 sets a demo clear command to end the demo display that has been executed in the transmission buffer. The demo clear command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and the image control board performs control to clear the demo image displayed on the display unit 21a (control to end the demo display) based on the received demo clear command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10305.
In step 10305, the sub CPU 301 turns off the demonstration flag, and then proceeds to the next step 10306.

In step 10306, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the power saving flag indicating that the power saving state is in effect is on, that is, whether the power saving state is in effect. If the power saving flag is not on (i.e., it is off), the start winning command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if the power saving flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 10307.
In step 10307, the sub-CPU 301 sets a power-saving state release command to end the current power-saving state in the transmission buffer. The power-saving state release command set here is sent to the various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and these control boards control the brightness of the performance display device 21, the lighting of various lamps, and the sound output by the sound output device 10 to return to the original state before the transition to the power-saving state based on the received power-saving state release command. Then, proceed to the next step 10308.

In step 10308, the sub-CPU 301 turns off the power saving flag, and ends the start winning command reception process.
In addition, the processing from step 10300 to step 10308 may be performed not based on the receipt of a start winning command, but based on the receipt of a variation mode command or a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100 when the display of the special pattern begins to change.

Next, the rotation operation command reception process executed when a rotation operation command is received among the command analysis processes in step 10101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 58. The rotation operation command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 216 of the timer interrupt process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the process in step 212.
In step 10400, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the measurement flag is on or not. If it is judged that the measurement flag is not on, the rotation operation command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the measurement flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 10401.
In step 10401, the sub CPU 301 resets the count value of the no-operation time timer counter. As a result, the count value of the no-operation time timer counter becomes 0 (the no-operation time returns to 0 seconds). Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10402.

In step 10402, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the power saving flag is on or not. If it is judged that the power saving flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the rotation operation command reception process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the power saving flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 10403.
In step 10403, the sub CPU 301 sets a power saving state release command in the transmission buffer.

In step 10404, the sub-CPU 301 turns off the power saving flag. Then, the rotation operation command reception process ends.

Next, the command reception process for fluctuations that is executed when a fluctuation mode command and a fluctuation pattern command are received during the command analysis process of step 10101 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 59. As described above, the fluctuation mode command and the fluctuation pattern command are stored in the main control board 100 in step 911 of the fluctuation performance pattern determination process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in step 212.

In step 10500, the sub-CPU 301 acquires the variable performance random number updated in the above-mentioned step 10001. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10501.
In step 10501, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether a first reference value reaching flag (a flag provided on the sub-control board 300) indicating that the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value is on, i.e., whether the difference ball count value has reached the first reference value. If it is determined that the first reference value reaching flag is on (i.e., the difference ball count value has reached (or has already reached) the first reference value), the process proceeds to step 10504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first reference value reaching flag is not on (i.e., the difference ball count value has not reached the first reference value), the process proceeds to the next step 10502.

In step 10502, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the determined special symbol is the jackpot symbol X1 or not. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the symbol determination command set in the above-mentioned step 807 and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 contains information on the type of the determined special symbol. The sub-CPU 301 can make the above-mentioned judgment based on the information on the special symbol contained in the received symbol determination command. Then, if it is judged that the symbol is not the jackpot symbol X1, the process proceeds to step 10504. On the other hand, if it is judged that the symbol is the jackpot symbol X1, the process proceeds to the next step 10503.
In step 10503, the sub-CPU 301 selects the variable performance determination table B as the variable performance determination table 121 to be referred to in order to determine the mode of the variable performance. Then, the process proceeds to step 10505.

In step 10504, which is reached when it is determined in step 10501 that the first reference value reaching flag is on, or when it is determined in step 10502 that the jackpot symbol is not X1, the sub-CPU 301 selects the variable performance determination table A as the variable performance determination table 121 to be referred to in order to determine the mode of the variable performance. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10505.
In step 10505, the sub-CPU 301 determines the mode of the variable performance based on the variable performance random number acquired in the above-mentioned step 10500, the variable mode number corresponding to the received variable mode command and the variable pattern number corresponding to the variable pattern command, and the variable performance determination table 121 selected in the above-mentioned step 10503 or 10504. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10506.

In step 10506, the sub-CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer a variable performance execution command corresponding to the mode of the variable performance determined in the above-mentioned step 10505. The variable performance execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and these control boards perform control to execute the variable performance based on the received variable performance execution command. Then, proceed to the next step 10507.
In step 10507, the sub CPU 301 executes a fluctuation start position correction process, and then ends the fluctuation command reception process.

Next, the fluctuation start position correction process in step 10507 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 10600, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not a malfunction flag indicating that a malfunction related to the displacement of the role-playing device YS has occurred is on. If it is judged that the malfunction flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the fluctuation start position correction process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the malfunction flag is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to the next step 10601.
In step 10601, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the role-playing device YS is located at the initial position. If it is judged that the role-playing device YS is located at the initial position, the sub-CPU 301 ends the position correction process at the start of the fluctuation. On the other hand, if it is judged that the role-playing device YS is not located at the initial position, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 10602.

In step 10602, the sub-CPU 301 executes the initial process. Specifically, the drive motor M is controlled so as to displace the role-playing device YS to the initial position, and after a predetermined confirmation time (300 ms) has elapsed, the sub-CPU 301 judges again whether the role-playing device YS is located at the initial position. Then, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 10603.
In step 10603, the sub-CPU 301 checks the result of the judgment in step 10602, and if it is judged that the role-playing device YS is located at the initial position, it ends the position correction process at the start of the fluctuation. On the other hand, if it is judged that the role-playing device YS is not located at the initial position, it proceeds to the next step 10604.

In step 10604, the sub-CPU 301 executes a retry process. Specifically, as in the initial process, the drive motor M is controlled so as to displace the role-playing device YS to the initial position, and after a predetermined confirmation time (300 ms) has elapsed, the sub-CPU 301 judges again whether the role-playing device YS is located at the initial position. Then, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 10605.
In step 10605, the sub-CPU 301 checks the result of the judgment in step 10604, and if it is judged that the role-playing device YS is located at the initial position, it ends the position correction process at the start of the fluctuation. On the other hand, if it is judged that the role-playing device YS is not located at the initial position, it proceeds to the next step 10606.

In step 10606, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the number of executions of the retry process reaches a predetermined number (2 times). If it is judged that the predetermined number has not been reached, the sub-CPU 301 returns to step 10604. On the other hand, if it is judged that the predetermined number has been reached, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 10607.
In step 10607, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the malfunction flag. Note that this malfunction flag turns off when the power is restored from the power interruption. Then, the fluctuation start position correction process is terminated.

Next, the difference ball related command receiving process executed when the first difference ball operation stop control designation command, the second difference ball operation stop control designation command, or the third difference ball operation stop control designation command is received from the command analysis process of step 10101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 61. The first difference ball operation stop control designation command, the second difference ball operation stop control designation command, and the third difference ball operation stop control designation command are stored in the main control board 100 in step 1872 of the difference ball related command set process, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the process of step 212.
In step 10700, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the first difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first difference ball operation stop control designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step 10702. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received, the process proceeds to the next step 10701.
In step 10701, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command to the transmission buffer to execute a suggestion that an activation warning state has been set. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and these control boards control the execution of the suggestion that an activation warning state has been set based on the received execution command. In addition, as described above, the sub-control board 300 is provided with a first reference value reaching flag, and the sub-CPU 301 turns on this first reference value reaching flag. Note that this first reference value reaching flag turns off when the ball difference count value is reset. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10702.

In step 10702, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the second difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second difference ball operation stop control designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step 10704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received, the process proceeds to the next step 10703.
In step 10703, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command to execute the indication that the activation advance notice state has been set in the transmission buffer. The execution command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and these control boards perform control to execute the indication that the activation advance notice state has been set based on the received execution command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10704.

In step 10704, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the third difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received. If it is judged that the third difference ball operation stop control designation command has not been received, the difference ball related command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the third difference ball operation stop control designation command has been received, the process proceeds to the next step 10705.
In step 10705, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command to execute the suggestion that the activation state has been set in the transmission buffer. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and these control boards perform control to execute the suggestion that the activation state has been set based on the received execution command. Note that the activation sound is output from the audio output device 10 at the maximum speaker volume ("7") regardless of the current speaker volume. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 10706.

In step 10706, the sub-CPU 301 executes the activation state setting reel control process, which is the process related to the reel performance device YS when the activation state is set. Then, the ball difference related command reception process ends.

Next, the reel control processing when the activation state is set in step 10704 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 62.
In step 10800, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the reel rotation performance by the reel performance device YS is being performed. If it is judged that the reel rotation performance is not being performed, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 10802. On the other hand, if it is judged that the reel rotation performance is being performed, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 10801.
In step 10801, the sub-CPU 301 sets a reel rotation performance stop command to stop the reel rotation performance in the transmission buffer. The reel rotation performance stop command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and the operation control board performs control to stop the reel rotation performance based on the received reel rotation performance stop command. Then, proceed to the next step 10802.

In step 10802, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the role production device YS is located at the initial position. If it is judged that the role production device YS is located at the initial position, the role control process at the time of activation state setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the role production device YS is not located at the initial position, the process proceeds to the next step 10803.
In step 10803, the sub-CPU 301 executes a position correction process when the activation state is set. Specifically, like the initial process and the retry process, the drive motor M is controlled so as to displace the role production device YS to the initial position. Then, the role control process when the activation state is set is terminated.

Next, the prize ball designation command reception process of the command analysis process of step 10101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 63. As described above, the prize ball designation command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 208 of the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the process of step 212. Although not shown in particular, at the start of a special game based on winning a jackpot during a normal game state, the sub-CPU 301 executes an initial display (for example, display of a text image of 0pt) for displaying the number of prize balls obtained in the lower right corner of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21.
In step 10900, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the game is in a special game or a high-probability time-saving game state. If the game is not in a special game or a high-probability time-saving game state (i.e., the game is in a normal game state), the sub-CPU 301 ends the prize ball designation command reception process. On the other hand, if the game is in a special game or a high-probability time-saving game state, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 10901.

In step 10901, the sub-CPU 301 increments the value of an acquired prize ball display counter, which is composed of a specified memory area of the sub-RAM 303 and accumulates the number of game balls acquired during special play and during a high-probability time-saving play state, by the number of prize balls corresponding to the received prize ball designation command. In other words, when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the general prize entry port 14 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the general prize entry port 14; when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the first start prize entry port 15 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the first start prize entry port 15; when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the second start prize entry port 16 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the second start prize entry port 16; and when a prize ball designation command corresponding to the large prize entry port 18 is received, the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is incremented by the number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the large prize entry port 18.
The value of this winning ball display counter is reset when the high probability time-saving game state ends, and becomes 0 at the start of a special game based on winning a jackpot during the normal game state.
Then, proceed to the next step 10902.

In step 10902, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the difference ball arrival display (display of the difference ball arrival image) is being executed. If it is judged that the difference ball arrival display is being executed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the prize ball designation command reception process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the difference ball arrival display is not being executed, the process proceeds to the next step 10903.
In step 10903, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the value of the acquired prize ball display counter is equal to or greater than the number of balls that will cause the game to stop (i.e., 95,000, which is the operation stop number). If it is judged that the value is not equal to or greater than the operation stop number (i.e., less than the operation stop number), the process proceeds to step 10905. On the other hand, if it is judged that the value is equal to or greater than the operation stop number, the process proceeds to the next step 10904.

In step 10904, the sub-CPU 301 sets an execution command for displaying the difference ball in the transmission buffer. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 10110 described above, and these control boards control the display of the difference ball based on the received execution command. Then, the prize ball designation command reception process ends.
In step 10905, which is reached when it is determined in step 10903 that the number of balls is not equal to or greater than the operation stop number, the sub-CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer an execution command for updating the displayed number of acquired prize balls to the current value of the acquired prize ball display counter. The execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards in step 10110, and these control boards control the execution of the above-mentioned update display based on the received execution command. Then, the prize ball designation command reception process ends.
Although not specifically shown, when the high probability time-saving game state ends without winning a jackpot, the sub-CPU 301 clears the display of the number of winning balls.

Next, the error indication command reception process of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 64. As described above, the error indication command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 207 of the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the process of step 212. Although not shown in particular, the sub-control board 300 of this embodiment is provided with an error flag indicating the occurrence of an error for each type of error that may occur.
In step 11000, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the error flag corresponding to the error (the error that has occurred) indicated by the received error indication command is on. If it is judged that the error flag is on, the error indication command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the error flag is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to the next step 11001.
In step 11001, the sub CPU 301 turns on the error flag corresponding to the error indicated by the received error indication command, and then ends the error indication command reception process.

Next, the error reset command reception process of the command analysis process in step 10101 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 65. As described above, the error reset command is stored in the main control board 100 in step 207 of the timer interrupt process of the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 300 by the process of step 212. In step 11100, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the error flag corresponding to the error (resolved error) indicated by the received error reset command is on. If it is determined that the error flag is not on, the error reset command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the error flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 11101.
In step 11101, the sub CPU 301 turns off the error flag corresponding to the error indicated by the received error reset command, and then ends the error reset command reception process.

Next, the standby state operation control process in step 10102 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 11200, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the measurement flag is on or not. If it is judged that the measurement flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the operation control process during the standby state. On the other hand, if it is judged that the measurement flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11201.
In step 11201, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the cross key 25 or the operation button 9b has been pressed, that is, whether the cross key detection sensor 25a detects the cross key 25 pressing operation, or the operation button 9b detects the pressing operation by the pressing operation detection sensor 9d. If it is judged that neither the cross key 25 nor the operation button 9b has been pressed, the operation control process during the standby state is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the cross key 25 or the operation button 9b has been pressed, the process proceeds to the next step 11202.

In step 11202, the sub CPU 301 resets the count value of the no-operation time timer counter.
In step 11203, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the power saving flag is on or not. If it is judged that the power saving flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the operation control process during the standby state. On the other hand, if it is judged that the power saving flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11204.

In step 11204, the sub CPU 301 sets a power saving state release command in the transmission buffer.
In step 11205, the sub CPU 301 turns off the power saving flag, and ends the standby state operation control process.

Next, the demo display control process in step 10103 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 11300, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the measurement flag is on or not. If it is judged that the measurement flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the demo display control process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the measurement flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 11301.
In step 11301, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the demo flag is off. If it is judged that the demo flag is not off (i.e., it is on), the sub-CPU 301 ends the demo display control process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the demo flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step 11302.

In step 11302, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the no-operation time has reached the demo start time, i.e., whether the count value of the no-operation time timer counter has reached a value corresponding to the demo start time. If it is judged that the no-operation time has not reached the demo start time, the sub-CPU 301 ends the demo display control process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the no-operation time has reached the demo start time, the process proceeds to the next step 11303.
In step 11303, the sub-CPU 301 sets a demo display command for executing a demo display in the transmission buffer. The demo display command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and the image control board performs control to execute the demo display based on the received demo display command. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11304.

In step 11304, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the function is in an activated state. If it is judged that the function is not in an activated state, the process proceeds to step 11306. On the other hand, if it is judged that the function is in an activated state, the process proceeds to the next step 11305.
In step 11305, the sub-CPU 301 sets a demo display restriction command for restricting the execution of the demo display in the transmission buffer. The demo display restriction command set here is sent to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and control to restrict the demo display is performed based on the received demo display restriction command. As a result, although the demo display is being executed internally, the demo image is not displayed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21. Then, proceed to the next step 11306.

In step 11306, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the demo in progress flag. Then, the demo display control process ends.

Next, the power saving state control process in step 10104 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 11400, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the demo flag is on or not. If it is judged that the demo flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the power saving state control process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the demo flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11401.
In step 11401, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the demo display has ended, i.e., whether the demo display time has elapsed. Although not shown in the figure, the sub-control board 300 in this embodiment is provided with a demo display time timer counter for measuring the demo display time, and when the demo display starts, the demo display time is set in the demo display time timer counter, thereby measuring the demo display time. If it is determined that the demo display has not ended, the power saving state control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo display has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 11402.

In step 11402, the sub-CPU 301 sets a demo display end command for clearing the demo display in the transmission buffer, and also sets a power saving state control command for transitioning to a power saving state in the transmission buffer. The demo display end command and power saving state control command set here are transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and these control boards perform control to clear the demo display based on the received demo display end command, and also perform control to reduce the brightness of the performance display device 21, turn off various lamps, and stop the output of sound by the sound output device 10 based on the received power saving state control command. Then, proceed to the next step 11403.
In step 11403, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the function is in an activated state. If it is judged that the function is not in an activated state, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 11405. On the other hand, if it is judged that the function is in an activated state, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11404.

In step 11404, the sub-CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer a power saving state restriction command for restricting the control of reducing the brightness of the performance display device 21, turning off various lamps, and stopping the output of sound by the sound output device 10 based on the transition to the power saving state. The power saving state restriction command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and based on the received power saving state restriction command, control is performed to restrict the reduction in the brightness of the performance display device 21, turning off various lamps, and stopping the output of sound by the sound output device 10. As a result, although the device is internally in the power saving state, the reduction in the brightness of the performance display device 21, the turning off of various lamps, and the stopping of the output of sound by the sound output device 10 are not performed. Then, proceed to the next step 11405.
In step 11405, the sub CPU 301 turns off the demo flag, and then proceeds to the next step 11406.

In step 11406, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the power saving flag. Then, the power saving state control process ends.

Next, the current speaker volume change process in step 10105 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 11500, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the cross key 25 has been pressed. If it is judged that the cross key 25 has not been pressed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current speaker volume change process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the cross key 25 has been pressed, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11501.
In step 11501, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not it is in the pattern determination period. Specifically, it judges whether or not it is in a state after receiving a pattern determination command from the main control board 100 and before receiving a stop display command from the main control board 100. If it is judged that it is in the pattern determination period, it ends the current speaker volume change process. On the other hand, if it is judged that it is not in the pattern determination period, it proceeds to the next step 11502.

In step 11502, if the up key is pressed, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is the maximum speaker volume. On the other hand, if the down key is pressed, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 is the minimum speaker volume. If it is determined that the current speaker volume is the maximum speaker volume (or the minimum speaker volume), the current speaker volume change process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current speaker volume is not the maximum speaker volume (or the minimum speaker volume), the process proceeds to the next step 11503.
In step 11503, if the up key is pressed, the sub-CPU 301 changes the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 to a speaker volume one level higher, and if the down key is pressed, the sub-CPU 301 changes the current speaker volume stored in the sub-RAM 303 to a speaker volume one level lower. Then, the current speaker volume change process is terminated.

Next, the pre-warning volume adjustment process in step 10106 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 11600, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the state is before the activation of a warning. If it is judged that the state is not before the activation of a warning, the sub-CPU 301 ends the volume adjustment process before the activation of a warning. On the other hand, if it is judged that the state is before the activation of a warning, the process proceeds to the next step 11601.
In step 11601, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not an error adjustment flag indicating that the channel adjustment value of the target channel (such as the performance sound channel or the channel 2 corresponding to the difference ball stop control sound) is changed based on the occurrence of an error is on. If it is judged that the error adjustment flag is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to step 11605. On the other hand, if it is judged that the error adjustment flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 11602.

In step 11602, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether any of the error flags is on. If it is judged that any of the error flags is on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-activation warning volume adjustment process. On the other hand, if it is judged that none of the error flags is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11603.
In step 11603, the sub-CPU 301 sets an error adjustment release command for canceling the change in the channel adjustment value of the target channel in the transmission buffer. The error adjustment release command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and based on the error adjustment release command received, the voice control board performs control to return the channel adjustment value of the target channel to its original value (i.e., change it to the initial value "2"). Then, proceed to the next step 11604.

In step 11604, the sub-CPU 301 turns off the error adjustment in progress flag, and ends the volume adjustment process before warning is issued.
In step 11605, which is reached when it is determined in step 11601 that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether any of the error flags are on. If it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the volume adjustment process before activation of a warning. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11606.

In step 11606, the sub-CPU 301 sets an error adjustment command for changing the channel adjustment value of the target channel in the transmission buffer. The error adjustment command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and the voice control board controls to change the channel adjustment value of the target channel based on the error adjustment command received. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11607.
In step 11607, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the error adjustment flag, and ends the volume adjustment process before warning is issued.

Next, the volume adjustment process during activation warning/notice in step 10107 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.
In step 11700, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the device is in an activation warning state or an activation notice state. If the device is not in an activation warning state or an activation notice state, the sub-CPU 301 ends the activation warning/notice volume adjustment process. On the other hand, if the device is in an activation warning state or an activation notice state, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11701.
In step 11701, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the error adjustment flag is on or not. If it is judged that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 11705. On the other hand, if it is judged that the error adjustment flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11702.

In step 11702, the sub CPU 301 judges whether or not any of the error flags is on. If it is judged that any of the error flags is on, the process proceeds to step 11708. On the other hand, if it is judged that none of the error flags is on, the process proceeds to the next step 11703.
In step 11703, the sub CPU 301 sets an error adjustment release command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11704.

In step 11704, the sub CPU 301 turns off the error adjustment in progress flag. Then, the process proceeds to step 11708.
In step 11705, which is reached if it is determined in step 11701 that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether any of the error flags are on. If it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 11708. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11706.

In step 11706, the sub CPU 301 sets the error adjustment command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11707.
In step 11707, the sub CPU 301 turns on the error adjustment in progress flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11708.
In step 11708, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether any of the error flags are on. If it is judged that any of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the activation warning/notice volume adjustment process. On the other hand, if it is judged that none of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11709.

In step 11709, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the activation warning sound (activation warning sound if in the activation warning state) is being output. If it is judged that the activation warning sound (activation warning sound) is not being output, the process proceeds to step 11713. On the other hand, if it is judged that the activation warning sound (activation warning sound) is being output, the process proceeds to the next step 11710.
In step 11710, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the output adjustment flag, which indicates that the channel adjustment value of the target channel (effect sound channel) is being changed based on the fact that the activation warning sound (activation notice sound) is being output, is on. If it is judged that the output adjustment flag is on, the activation warning/notice volume adjustment process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is judged that the output adjustment flag is not on (i.e., off), the process proceeds to the next step 11711.

In step 11711, the sub-CPU 301 sets an output adjustment command for changing the channel adjustment value of the target channel in the transmission buffer. The output adjustment command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and the voice control board controls to change the channel adjustment value of the target channel based on the output adjustment command received. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11712.
In step 11712, the sub-CPU 301 turns on the adjustment flag during output, and ends the volume adjustment process during activation warning/notice.

In step 11713, which is reached when it is determined in step 11709 that the activation warning sound (activation advance sound) is not being output, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the output adjustment flag is on. If it is determined that the output adjustment flag is not on, the activation warning/advance sound volume adjustment process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output adjustment flag is on, the process proceeds to the next step 11714.
In step 11714, the sub-CPU 301 sets an output adjustment release command for canceling the change in the channel adjustment value of the target channel in the transmission buffer. The output adjustment release command set here is transmitted to various control boards in the above-mentioned step 10110, and based on the output adjustment release command received, the audio control board performs control to return the channel adjustment value of the target channel to its original value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11715.

In step 11715, the sub-CPU 301 turns off the adjustment flag during output. Then, the volume adjustment process during activation warning/notice is terminated.

Next, the volume adjustment process during activation in step 10107 described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
In step 11800, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether or not the activation state is in progress. If it is judged that the activation state is not in progress, the sub-CPU 301 ends the activation volume adjustment process. On the other hand, if it is judged that the activation state is in progress, the process proceeds to the next step 11801.
In step 11801, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the error adjustment flag is on or not. If it is judged that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to step 11805. On the other hand, if it is judged that the error adjustment flag is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11802.

In step 11802, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether any of the error flags is on. If it is judged that any of the error flags is on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the activated volume adjustment process. On the other hand, if it is judged that none of the error flags is on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11803.
In step 11803, the sub CPU 301 sets an error adjustment release command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11804.

In step 11804, the sub-CPU 301 turns off the error adjustment in progress flag, and ends the ongoing volume adjustment process.
In step 11805, which is reached when it is determined in step 11801 that the error adjustment flag is not on, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether any of the error flags are on. If it is determined that none of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 ends the activated volume adjustment process. On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the error flags are on, the sub-CPU 301 proceeds to the next step 11806.

In step 11806, the sub CPU 301 sets the error adjustment command in the transmission buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11807.
In step 11807, the sub CPU 301 turns on the error adjustment in progress flag. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 11808.

In step 11808, the sub-CPU 301 executes control to output the corresponding error indication sound at maximum speaker volume regardless of the current speaker volume. Then, the active volume adjustment process is terminated.

Next, a modification of the above embodiment will be described.
In the above-described embodiment, after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the display of the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3, which is executed in the first half of the variable presentation and indicates that a jackpot has been won and the jackpot pattern X1 has been determined, is restricted, but the presentation the execution of which is restricted is not limited to this.
For example, in the latter half of the variable performance, if it is possible to execute a suggestive performance (for example, display of a specific character image, etc.) that suggests that the jackpot pattern X1 has been determined, the execution of the suggestive performance may be restricted. Also, when the reserved special random number is determined to be a jackpot winning and the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, if it is possible to display a specific reserved image 52 (for example, a rainbow reserved image 52, etc.), the display of the reserved image 52 may be restricted. Also, when the reserved special random number is determined to be a jackpot winning and the jackpot pattern X1 is determined, if it is possible to execute a pre-reading performance in which a specific pre-reading image (for example, a rainbow band image, etc.) is displayed, the execution of the pre-reading performance may be restricted.
In the above case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In addition, the effect for restricting the execution is not limited to the effect suggesting that the jackpot has been won and the jackpot pattern X1 has been determined.
For example, the execution of the effect suggesting that a jackpot has been won may be restricted. Also, for example, in the case where a normal game state or a high probability time-saving game state can be set after the end of a special game according to the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol) determined at the time of winning a jackpot, the execution of the effect suggesting that a jackpot symbol for which the high probability time-saving game state is set has been determined may be restricted.
In other words, when it is possible to execute an effect that suggests that the award of a gaming profit advantageous to the player has been decided, the execution of the effect may be restricted.
In the above case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In addition, the effects to be restricted from execution are not limited to effects that suggest that a game profit advantageous to the player has been determined. For example, the execution of effects that have a high expectation of determining the award of a game profit advantageous to the player may also be restricted.
In addition, the method of restricting the execution of the effect is not limited to preventing the execution of the target effect. For example, the method may be set so that the possibility of executing the target effect becomes extremely low after the restriction compared to before the restriction.
Furthermore, the execution of the performance may be restricted as follows.
For example, even after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the target effect may be executed, but the effect may not be visible when the target effect is executed. Specifically, even after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the display of the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 may be executed, and when the display is executed, the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 may be displayed as a transparent image with an extremely high transparency so that it is invisible or almost invisible, so that it is not possible to recognize that the rainbow cut-in image CP1-3 is displayed on the display unit 21a of the effect display device 21.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.
Also, for example, in variable effects, pre-reading effects, etc., it may be possible to display a special image (for example, a mini-character image showing a specified character and displayed only when a jackpot is won) with reduced visibility by making the display size smaller than the effect pattern 50 or reserved image, and the display of the special image may be restricted after the difference ball count value reaches a first reference value.
Specifically, for example, similar to the above-described embodiment, the display of the above-described special image may not be executed after the ball difference count value reaches the first reference value.
Also, for example, before the difference ball count value reaches a first reference value, the display position of the above-mentioned special image may be the center of the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, but after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the display position of the above-mentioned special image may be changed to one of the four corners of the display unit 21a, which is more difficult to see than before the difference ball count value reached the first reference value, thereby restricting the display of the special image.
Furthermore, for example, before the difference ball count value reaches a first reference value, the priority of displaying the above-mentioned special image may be set to the highest, for example, so that the special image is displayed without being obscured by any of the images being displayed; however, after the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, the priority of displaying the above-mentioned special image may be changed to a lower priority, for example, so that the special image is displayed while being obscured by the performance pattern 50 or a background image, thereby restricting the display of the special image.
Furthermore, for example, when the above-mentioned special image is displayed before the difference ball count value reaches a first reference value, the special image is displayed alone without any other images being added, but when the above-mentioned special image is displayed after the difference ball count value reaches a first reference value, the display of the special image may be restricted by displaying the special image with another image added that covers part or all of the special image.
In the above case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, the lottery result derived by the lottery for the big win is either winning or losing the big win, but this is not limited to this. For example, in addition to winning the big win, a small win may be set in which a small win game is executed in which the big win opening 18 is opened, which is a game different from the special game.
In addition, when a small prize is set as a winning prize, the difference ball operation stop control may be executed for the small prize game based on the winning prize won by the lottery of the big prize, similar to the case of the special game in the above-mentioned embodiment. Specifically, when the difference ball count value reaches the first reference value, an activation warning state is set, and when the small prize game is being played when the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value, an activation notice state is set, and when the small prize game being played ends, an activation state may be set.
In addition, in a pachinko machine P (a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed pachinko machine) in which a special area into which a game ball can enter is provided within the large prize opening 18 and a special game is set to be executed when a game ball enters the special area during a small win game, an activation warning state is set when the difference ball count value reaches a first reference value, and if a small win game is being executed when the difference ball count value reaches a second reference value, an activation notice state is set, when a small win game being executed ends without a game ball entering the special area, an activation state is set when the small win game ends, and when a game ball enters the special area during a small win game and a special game is executed after the small win game ends, an activation state is set when the special game ends.
In this case, even if the difference ball count value reaches the second reference value during a small win game or a special game executed through a small win game, the game continues until the small win game or the special game ends, so that the player's interest can be sustained.

In the above embodiment, the difference ball operation stop control is executed based on the difference ball number, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same control as the difference ball operation stop control of the above embodiment may be executed based on the cumulative number of prize balls paid out (i.e., the number of prize balls acquired). For example, when the number of prize balls acquired reaches the warning execution number (the number of acquired prize balls that is a predetermined number (for example, 5,000 balls) less than the operation stop number at which the game will stop), an activation warning state is set, when the number of acquired prize balls acquired reaches the operation stop number (the number of acquired prize balls acquired at which the game will stop) and a special game is being executed at the time of the reaching, an activation notice state is set, and when the special game is not being executed when the special game ends or the number of acquired prize balls acquired reaches the operation stop number, an activation state may be set. In addition, the number of acquired prize balls acquired displayed during the special game or the high probability time-saving game state may not display the operation stop number at which the game will stop.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, the control states of the pachinko machine P are set to four states, namely, a play stop state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, and a playable state, and the activation state set based on the difference ball count value reaching the second reference value performs various controls as one state in the playable state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the control states of the pachinko machine P may be set to an activation state in addition to the above four, and this activation state may be set as a control state that can be set separately from the playable state, and various controls similar to those in the above embodiment may be performed.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, when the activation state is set during the standby state, the measurement of the non-operation time that starts based on the start of the standby state is set to continue, but the time for which the measurement is continued after the activation state is set is not limited to the non-operation time. For example, the measurement may be continued even after the activation state is set for the fluctuation time that starts to be measured from the start of the fluctuation, the performance start time that starts to be measured from a predetermined start point during the execution of the fluctuation performance and is the time until the predetermined performance is executed, the opening time that starts to be measured from the start of the special game, the opening time of the large winning hole 18 that starts to be measured from the start of the round game, the ending time that starts to be measured from the end of all the round games, the opening time of the movable piece 16b that starts to be measured from the opening of the movable piece 16b, etc.
Even in this case, since there is no need to provide different programs depending on whether or not the activation state is set, the storage capacity of the main ROM 102 and the sub-ROM 302 can be reduced.
In the above embodiment, only one big prize opening 18 is provided, but this is not limited to this, and there may be provided a plurality of big prize openings 18. When a plurality of big prize openings 18 are provided, a different big prize opening 18 may be opened for each round of play.
In this case, in a control state in which the game is not progressing (game stop state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, activation state), the opening and closing doors 18b of all the large prize openings 18 may be closed.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a special area into which a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 18 can enter and a special area movable piece that can open and close the special area may be provided, and a different game state may be set after the end of a special game based on whether or not a game ball has entered the special area during the special game. In this case, the operation of the special area movable piece may be restricted in a control state in which the game is not progressing, similar to the movable piece 16b of the second start prize opening 16 and the opening and closing door 18b of the large prize opening 18.
In this case, in a control state in which the game is not progressing, it is possible to prevent malfunctions such as causing the game ball to enter the special area described above.

In the above embodiment, the current speaker volume can be changed by pressing the cross key 25, but the settings of the pachinko machine P other than the speaker volume may be changed by a specified operation. For example, the light intensity of the lamp 23, etc. may be changed by a specified operation. If the light intensity can be changed, the light intensity may be changed outside the pattern change period, similar to the change of the current speaker volume. The light intensity may be controlled in the same way as the current speaker volume (for example, during the activation state, the lamp 23, etc. is always lit with the maximum light intensity regardless of the set light intensity). During the activation state, the current speaker volume can be changed, but the light intensity cannot be changed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P, when a door open error and an illegal prize entry error occur simultaneously, the error notification of the illegal prize entry error takes precedence over the error notification of the door open error (i.e., the illegal prize entry error has a higher priority than the door open error), and in a case where it is set so that the occurrence of a door open error can be determined even during an activated state, if an error suggestion for an illegal prize entry error is being made while an activated state is being set, for example, when the front door 3 is opened and a game ball illegally enters the large prize opening 18, the error suggestion for the illegal prize entry error is not executed and the error suggestion for the door open error is executed.

In addition, when the activation notice state is set and an activation notice text image is displayed on the display unit 21a, if a demo display is started, the display of the activation notice text image may be continued while the demo display is being executed.
In addition, the display of a warning image (for example, an image to remind the player not to forget to take the card (such as a text image saying "Be careful not to forget to take your prepaid card"), an image to warn the player not to get too absorbed in the game (such as a text image saying "Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation"), and an image to make the player aware that the pachinko machine is a controlled gaming machine (such as a text image saying "This pachinko machine is a Sma-Pachi")) during the execution of the demo display can be executed, and when the display of the activation notice text image is continued while the demo display is being executed, the activation notice text image and the warning image may not be displayed overlapping each other. For example, the warning image may be displayed in a display position on the display unit 21a that does not overlap with the activation notice text image, or the display timing of the activation notice text image and the display timing of the warning image may be made different.

In the above embodiment, the movable piece 16b of the second start winning opening 16 and the opening and closing door 18b of the large winning opening 18 are operated by a solenoid, but the device for operating these is not limited to a solenoid, and for example, a motor may be used. In a control state in which the game is not progressing, the operation of this motor may be restricted.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the launch/payout control board 200 controls both the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls, but this is not limited to this.
For example, a board for controlling the launch of game balls (launch control board) and a board for controlling the payout of prize balls (payout control board) may be provided separately. In this case, in a control state in which the game is not progressing, only the control of the launch of game balls by the launch control board may be stopped, and the control of the payout of prize balls by the payout control board may not be stopped.
In this way, the control burden on each board can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout of prize balls is controlled by the launch and payout control board 200, and even if the control related to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 (detection of game balls entering each winning port, drawing of jackpots, display of changing special patterns, drawing of normal patterns, display of changing normal patterns, etc.) is stopped in a game stop state in which the game is not progressing or in an activated state, the control of the payout of prize balls by the launch and payout control board 200 continues, but the control manner of the payout of prize balls is not limited to this.
For example, the main control board 100 may directly control the payout of prize balls, and in a game stop state or an activated state in which the game is not progressing, the control of the game progress by the main control board 100 may be stopped, but the control of the payout of prize balls by the main control board 100 may continue.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the main CPU 101 is configured not to detect the entry of game balls into each winning port in a control state in which the game is not progressing, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, even if a control state in which game play does not progress is set, the main CPU 101 can detect the entry of a game ball into each winning port until a specific time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed in which a shot-out game ball can reach the outlet 19.Therefore, if a game ball shot out before the control state in which game play does not progress is set enters one of the winning ports after the control state in which game play does not progress is set, the ball entry can be detected and prize balls based on the ball entry can be paid out in the control state in which game play does not progress.
In this case, it is possible to further reduce the disadvantage that may occur to the player due to the control state being set in which the game does not progress.

In the above embodiment, the control state at the time of power recovery is set according to the control state that existed immediately before the power failure, the on or off state of the setting switch 108 at the time of power recovery, the on or off state of the RAM clear switch 109, the on or off state of the main body frame open detection sensor 2a, the occurrence of a backup abnormality, and the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, but the judgment conditions for setting the control state are not limited to these. For example, the on or off state of another sensor such as the front door open detection sensor 3a may be added as a judgment condition. In addition, any of the judgment conditions described above (for example, the on or off state of the main body frame open detection sensor 2a) may be excluded.
In addition, even if the main body frame open detection sensor 2a turns off in the setting confirmation state or setting change state, the setting confirmation state or setting change state may be continued.

In the above embodiment, the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is set only when the power is restored after a power outage, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the power of the pachinko machine P is on, the setting confirmation state or the setting change state may be set by performing a predetermined operation.
Moreover, the above-mentioned modified examples can be combined with each other to the extent possible.

In addition, the difference ball operation stop control in the above embodiment and the control of the main CPU 101 in the state where the game is not progressing in the above embodiment can be applied to other pachinko machines and gaming machines other than pachinko machines. For example, in a pachinko machine (so-called pinball machine) in which a special game is executed by a game ball entering a special area (so-called V zone) provided in the big prize opening, various states (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, activation state) related to the difference ball operation stop control can be set based on the number of difference balls, and even when a state where the game is not progressing (game stop state, activation state) is set, the operation of the opening and closing door of the big prize opening can be restricted or the payout of the game balls can be continued. Also, in a slot machine in which games are played using game medals as the game medium, various states (pre-activation warning state, activation warning state, activation notice state, activation state) related to the difference ball activation stop control can be set based on the difference number (the difference between the number of game medals inserted and the number of game medals paid out), and even when a state in which the game is not progressing (game stop state, activation state) is set, the operation of the start switch, stop switch, etc. and the movement of specified performance devices can be restricted, or the payout of game medals can be continued.
In addition, the controlled game machine may also adopt the difference ball operation stop control in the above embodiment and the control of the main CPU 101 in the state where the game is not progressing in the above embodiment. Here, the controlled game machine is configured as follows: (A) the player plays a game by shooting game balls onto the surface of the controlled game machine game board, (B) there is no upper tray or lower tray, and the player cannot directly touch the game balls, (C) the minimum number required for shooting is circulated within the game machine, (D) the number of game balls and acquired game balls are managed and displayed as numerical data by the controlled game machine, and (E) when the game ends, the number of game balls managed by the controlled game machine can be transferred to a dedicated unit and managed by pressing a counting switch. Then, when a game ball is shot out, the above-mentioned numerical data is subtracted (incremented by 1), and when the game ball enters a winning slot, a value corresponding to the winning (a value equivalent to a payout) is added to the above-mentioned numerical data (a game value is awarded), thereby executing the difference ball operation stop control in the above-mentioned embodiment and the control of the main CPU 101 when the game is not progressing in the above-mentioned embodiment.

The main control board 100 in the above embodiment corresponds to the game control means of the present invention. The game balls in the above embodiment correspond to the game value of the present invention. The payout motor 62 and the launch payout control board 200 in the above embodiment correspond to the granting means of the present invention. The no-operation time timer counter in the above embodiment corresponds to the timing means of the present invention. The time when the difference ball count value is reset in the above embodiment corresponds to the predetermined calculation start time of the present invention. The number of operation stops in the above embodiment corresponds to the specific amount of the present invention. The activation state in the above embodiment corresponds to the non-playable state of the present invention. The demo start time in the above embodiment corresponds to the predetermined time of the present invention. The demo display in the above embodiment corresponds to the specified process of the present invention. The pachinko machine P in the above embodiment corresponds to the gaming machine of the present invention. The display of the activation character image (activation suggestion) in the above embodiment corresponds to the non-playable state suggestion of the present invention. The performance display device 21 in the above embodiment corresponds to the suggestion means of the present invention. The demo display in the above embodiment corresponds to the specific suggestion of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 10 Audio output device 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
200 Firing and dispensing control board 201 Dispensing CPU
202 Payout ROM
203 Dispatch RAM
300 Sub-control board 301 Sub-CPU
302 Sub ROM
303 Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A suggestion means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion;
An operation means operable by a player;
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A granting means for granting a predetermined amount of game value when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A timing unit that starts measuring an elapsed time based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied,
the game control means is capable of setting a game disabled state in which progress of a game is disabled based on a difference amount, which is a difference between an amount of game value related to the granting by the granting means from a predetermined calculation start time point and an amount of game value used in a game, reaching a specific amount;
A setting value for the operation of the suggestion means can be set to any one of a plurality of stages, and a predetermined suggestion can be executed based on the set setting value;
By performing a predetermined operation using the operation means, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values,
A gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined process when the elapsed time measured by the timing means reaches a predetermined time,
When the timing is being performed by the timing means, the timing is continued even if the non-playable state is set ,
The suggestion means is capable of executing a non-playable state suggestion that suggests that the non-playable state is being set when the non-playable state is set,
A gaming machine characterized in that, even if the specified operation is performed while the suggestion of a non-playable state is being executed, the suggestion of a non-playable state is executed based on a predetermined specific setting value regardless of the specified operation .

Images